CN102819231A - Control system design device - Google Patents
Control system design device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CN102819231A CN102819231A CN2012102112375A CN201210211237A CN102819231A CN 102819231 A CN102819231 A CN 102819231A CN 2012102112375 A CN2012102112375 A CN 2012102112375A CN 201210211237 A CN201210211237 A CN 201210211237A CN 102819231 A CN102819231 A CN 102819231A
- Authority
- CN
- China
- Prior art keywords
- network
- plc
- information
- connection path
- grid
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Granted
Links
Images
Landscapes
- Programmable Controllers (AREA)
Abstract
本发明涉及一种控制系统设计装置,该控制系统设计装置与将多个可编程控制器(以下称为PLC)经由网络进行连接而构成的控制系统中的1个PLC连接,将该PLC作为起点PLC,针对控制系统收集网络结构信息和控制系统中的连接至各个PLC的联机连接通路,根据上述网络结构信息和联机连接通路,计算网络间的配置关系、PLC的连接关系、以及它们的坐标,作为对象显示在显示部上。
The present invention relates to a control system design device that is connected to one PLC in a control system configured by connecting a plurality of programmable controllers (hereinafter referred to as PLCs) via a network, and uses the PLC as a starting point PLC, for the control system, collects network structure information and the online connection paths connected to each PLC in the control system, and calculates the configuration relationship between networks, the connection relationship of PLC, and their coordinates according to the above network structure information and online connection paths, Displayed on the display as an object.
Description
本申请是基于2007年5月31日提出的中国国家申请号200780053166.8(国际申请号PCT/JP2007/061060)申请(控制系统设计装置)的分案申请,以下引用其内容。This application is a divisional application based on the Chinese National Application No. 200780053166.8 (International Application No. PCT/JP2007/061060) (control system design device) filed on May 31, 2007, the contents of which are quoted below.
技术领域 technical field
本发明涉及一种控制系统设计装置,其在经由网络连接可编程控制器等多个控制装置的控制系统中,辅助进行系统结构的设定和管理。The present invention relates to a control system design device for assisting setting and management of a system configuration in a control system in which a plurality of control devices such as programmable controllers are connected via a network.
背景技术 Background technique
当前,使用可编程控制器(以下称为PLC)以用于对生产设备进行控制。使用设计装置与该PLC连接而进行规定的程序设计和维护。设计装置通常是通过个人计算机运行的,除了辅助进行用于使PLC执行控制的程序的生成之外,还具有下述功能,即,将运行设计装置的个人计算机与PLC连接,而将生成的程序向PLC发送或监视PLC进行控制的状态。Currently, programmable logic controllers (hereinafter referred to as PLCs) are used for controlling production equipment. Predetermined program design and maintenance are performed by connecting to this PLC using a design device. The design device is usually operated by a personal computer. In addition to assisting in the generation of the program for the PLC to execute the control, it also has the following function, that is, the personal computer running the design device is connected to the PLC, and the generated program Send to PLC or monitor the status of PLC control.
各个PLC具有基板(背板(backplane)),在该基板上安装用于网络连接的通信单元。通过在通信单元之间经由线缆等通信回路进行连接,而构筑由多个PLC组成的控制系统。在生产设备规模较大的控制系统中,使用大量PLC,将这些PLC之间进行连接的网络的结构也变得复杂。Each PLC has a substrate (backplane) on which a communication unit for network connection is mounted. A control system consisting of multiple PLCs is constructed by connecting communication units through communication circuits such as cables. In a control system with a large-scale production facility, a large number of PLCs are used, and the structure of a network connecting these PLCs also becomes complicated.
在上述设计装置中具有如下类型的装置,其可以在脱机状态下生成控制系统的网络结构,进行图形显示,并且利用该图形显示进行PLC的监视或向PLC进行程序传送等。但是,在具有复杂结构的控制系统中,有时存在多个相同种类的PLC,在设计装置所显示的画面中无法区分进行设定的PLC。由此,提出一种对作为监视或设定对象的PLC进行突出显示的技术(例如参照专利文献1)。Among the design devices described above, there is a device capable of generating a network structure of a control system in an off-line state, displaying it graphically, and using the graphical display to monitor the PLC or transfer programs to the PLC. However, in a control system having a complex structure, there may be a plurality of PLCs of the same type, and the PLCs to be set cannot be distinguished on the screen displayed on the design device. Accordingly, a technique for highlighting a PLC to be monitored or set has been proposed (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).
专利文献1:特开2006-277734号公报Patent Document 1: JP-A-2006-277734
发明内容 Contents of the invention
但是,在专利文献1中,设计装置的使用者预先基于实际的网络结构,通过在设计装置上进行PLC配置,在各PLC中对设定值进行设定,而在脱机状态下生成控制系统的网络结构及系统结构的信息。在脱机状态下生成结构复杂的控制系统的网络结构和PLC的系统结构的信息的情况下,产生可能使PLC间的连接等发生错误这样的问题点。However, in
另外,在专利文献1中,虽然可以突出显示作为对象的PLC的位置,但是对于例如求出用于设计装置从所连接的位置开始向作为对象的PLC进行信息传递的最佳连接通路的方法,并没有公开。In addition, in
并且,在将多个网络连接而构成的控制系统中,在位于网络和网络之间的PLC中,设定用于可以跨越多个网络进行数据传送的路由参数。但是,存在第三者难以理解该路由参数是用于从哪个请求源向哪个请求目标进行瞬时(transient)传送的问题点。另外,在对现有的控制系统结构进行追加变更的情况下、或构筑新控制系统的情况下,由系统构筑者手动进行路由参数的计算,存在该计算较难的问题点。In addition, in a control system configured by connecting a plurality of networks, routing parameters for enabling data transfer across a plurality of networks are set in PLCs located between the networks. However, there is a problem that it is difficult for a third party to understand that the routing parameter is for transient transfer from which request source to which request destination. In addition, when adding and changing the existing control system configuration or constructing a new control system, there is a problem that the calculation of routing parameters is manually performed by the system builder, and the calculation is difficult.
本发明就是鉴于上述问题点而提出的,其目的在于得到一种控制系统设计装置,其可以对现有的由多个PLC组成的控制系统中的网络结构和PLC的系统结构进行收集,自动地以图形化显示该构成。The present invention is proposed in view of the above problems, and its purpose is to obtain a control system design device, which can collect the network structure and the system structure of PLC in the existing control system composed of multiple PLCs, and automatically This composition is displayed graphically.
另外,本发明的目的还在于得到一种控制系统设计装置,其可以在以脱机状态图形化地生成网络结构的情况下,自动地计算从成为起点的位置至成为目标的位置的PLC为止的最佳连接通路,并进行突出显示。In addition, an object of the present invention is to obtain a control system design device that can automatically calculate the distance from the starting point to the target PLC when the network structure is graphically generated offline. The best connection pathways are highlighted.
并且,本发明的目的还在于得到一种控制系统设计装置,其在对现有的控制系统的结构进行追加变更的情况、或者构筑新的控制系统的情况下,也可以容易地设定包含针对PLC的路由参数在内的网络参数。Furthermore, an object of the present invention is to obtain a control system design device that can easily set the Network parameters including PLC routing parameters.
为了实现上述目的,本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置的特征在于,具有:通信单元,其与控制系统中的1个控制装置连接,其中,该控制系统是将多个控制装置经由网络连接而成的;起点控制装置指定单元,其将与所述通信单元连接的所述控制装置指定为起点控制装置;联机网络结构信息收集单元,其经由所述通信单元,从构成所述控制系统的控制装置收集包含该控制装置所具有的控制装置结构、以及所述控制装置所连接的网络在内的联机网络结构信息;显示对象坐标计算单元,其将所述控制系统的结构要素作为对象,计算用于将通过所述联机网络结构信息收集单元得到的各控制装置的结构、和各控制装置与网络之间的连接关系,使用对象而显示在显示单元上所需的坐标;以及系统结构显示单元,其根据通过所述显示对象坐标计算单元而计算出的对象和所述坐标,将所述控制系统的系统结构显示在所述显示单元上,所述显示对象坐标计算单元具有:网络框格配置功能模块,其从所述联机网络结构信息中提取网络,将提取到的网络作为矩形形状的网络框格,按照规定的规则上下配置;控制装置框格配置功能模块,其从所述联机网络结构信息中提取控制装置,在与所述控制装置连接的网络框格的下位配置矩形形状的控制装置框格,针对具有连接关系的网络框格,在所述控制装置框格和所述网络框格之间向上方配置矩形形状的配线框格,从而生成框格模型;框格尺寸计算功能模块,其根据所述联机网络结构信息的所述控制装置的结构信息,计算所述框格模型中的所述控制装置框格的尺寸,并且与所述控制装置的尺寸对应而变更相关的配线框格和网络框格的尺寸,从而计算框格尺寸;以及框格坐标计算功能模块,其将所述框格模型的规定位置作为基准,利用所述框格尺寸计算所述框格模型中的各个框格的坐标,所述网络框格配置功能模块将提取到的网络按种类进行分类,针对分类后的各个网络种类进行以下处理,即,对于与网络连接的控制装置中,还与现场网络连接的控制装置的数量或者比例越多的网络,就越向下位配置,将仅与其它信息系统网络连接的控制装置的数量或者比例越多的网络,就越向上位配置,将还与其它控制器间网络连接的控制装置的数量或者比例越多的网络,就越向上位配置,所述控制装置框格配置功能模块将与同一个网络连接的控制装置框格更靠近地进行配置。In order to achieve the above object, the control system design device according to the present invention is characterized by having a communication unit connected to one control device in a control system in which a plurality of control devices are connected via a network. a starting point control device specifying unit, which specifies the control device connected to the communication unit as a starting point control device; an online network structure information collecting unit, via the communication unit, from the control constituting the control system The device collects online network structure information including the control device structure of the control device and the network to which the control device is connected; a display object coordinate calculation unit that uses the structural elements of the control system as objects for calculation. The structure of each control device to be obtained through the online network structure information collection unit, and the connection relationship between each control device and the network, using objects to display coordinates required on the display unit; and a system structure display unit, It displays the system structure of the control system on the display unit based on the object and the coordinates calculated by the display object coordinate calculation unit, and the display object coordinate calculation unit has a network grid configuration function A module, which extracts the network from the online network structure information, uses the extracted network as a rectangular network frame, and arranges it up and down according to the specified rules; the control device frame configuration function module, which uses the online network structure information extracting the control device, disposing a rectangular control device grid below the network grid connected to the control device, and for the network grids having a connection relationship, between the control device grid and the network grid Arranging rectangular-shaped wiring grids upwards to generate a grid model; the grid size calculation function module calculates the grid size in the grid model according to the structure information of the control device in the online network structure information. The size of the grid of the control device, and corresponding to the size of the control device to change the size of the relevant wiring grid and network grid, so as to calculate the size of the grid; and the grid coordinate calculation function module, which converts the The specified position of the sash model is used as a reference, and the coordinates of each sash in the sash model are calculated by using the size of the sash, and the network sash configuration function module classifies the extracted networks by type, and for classification Each of the following network types performs the following processing. Among the control devices connected to the network, the more the number or ratio of control devices connected to the field network, the lower the configuration, and only the other information system networks will be connected. A network with a greater number or ratio of connected control devices is placed higher up, and a network with a larger number or ratio of control devices that are also connected to other inter-controller networks is placed higher up. The sash configuration function module configures control device sashes connected to the same network closer together.
发明的效果The effect of the invention
根据本发明,具有以下效果,即,针对由PLC等多个控制设备组成的控制系统整体的网络结构及控制装置的系统结构的信息,通过与控制系统连接而进行收集,从而可以连同其连接关系一起图形化地进行显示,可以容易地把握构成控制系统的网络及控制装置的系统结构整体,并且,由于将收集到的网络结构信息以使用者易于把握的网络顺序进行显示,所以易于对构成控制系统的网络及控制装置的系统结构整体进行把握。另外,还具有易于对构成控制系统的网络及控制装置的系统结构整体的状态进行把握的效果。According to the present invention, there is an effect that the information on the overall network configuration of the control system composed of a plurality of control devices such as PLCs and the system configuration of the control devices is collected by connecting to the control system, so that the connection relationship can be obtained together. Graphically displayed together, it is easy to grasp the overall system structure of the network and control device that constitute the control system, and since the collected network structure information is displayed in a network order that is easy for the user to understand, it is easy to control the structure. The network of the system and the system structure of the control device are grasped as a whole. In addition, there is an effect that it is easy to grasp the state of the overall system configuration of the network and the control device constituting the control system.
附图说明 Description of drawings
图1是示意地表示控制系统的网络结构的一个例子的图。FIG. 1 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a network configuration of a control system.
图2是示意地表示控制系统设计装置的硬件结构的框图。FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the control system design device.
图3是示意地表示本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置的实施方式1的功能结构的框图。FIG. 3 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional configuration of
图4-1是表示控制系统的结构的一个例子的图。FIG. 4-1 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a control system.
图4-2是表示与图4-1对应的框格模型(grid model)的一个例子的图。FIG. 4-2 is a diagram showing an example of a grid model corresponding to FIG. 4-1.
图5-1是表示控制系统的结构的一个例子的图。FIG. 5-1 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a control system.
图5-2是表示与图5-1对应的框格模型的一个例子的图。Fig. 5-2 is a diagram showing an example of a grid model corresponding to Fig. 5-1.
图6-1是表示控制系统的结构的一个例子的图。FIG. 6-1 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the control system.
图6-2是表示与图6-1对应的框格模型的一个例子的图。Fig. 6-2 is a diagram showing an example of a grid model corresponding to Fig. 6-1.
图7-1是表示控制系统的结构的一个例子的图。FIG. 7-1 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a control system.
图7-2是表示控制系统的结构的一个例子的图。FIG. 7-2 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the control system.
图7-3是表示与图7-1对应的框格模型的一个例子的图。Fig. 7-3 is a diagram showing an example of a grid model corresponding to Fig. 7-1.
图7-4是表示与图7-2对应的框格模型的一个例子的图。Fig. 7-4 is a diagram showing an example of a grid model corresponding to Fig. 7-2.
图8是示意地表示显示对象坐标计算部的功能结构的框图。FIG. 8 is a block diagram schematically showing a functional configuration of a display object coordinate calculation unit.
图9-1是表示网络结构信息收集处理步骤的一个例子的流程图(其1)。FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart (Part 1) showing an example of a network configuration information collection processing procedure.
图9-2是表示网络结构信息收集处理步骤的一个例子的流程图(其2)。FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart (Part 2 ) showing an example of a network configuration information collection process procedure.
图9-3是表示网络结构信息收集处理步骤的一个例子的流程图(其3)。FIG. 9-3 is a flowchart (part 3 ) showing an example of a network configuration information collection processing procedure.
图10是表示保持在联机连接通路保持部中的连接通路信息的一个例子的图。FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of connection path information held in an online connection path storage unit.
图11是表示在联机网络结构信息存储部中所储存的网络结构信息的一个例子的图。FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of network configuration information stored in an online network configuration information storage unit.
图12是表示网络信息收集的限制的一个例子的图。FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of restrictions on collection of network information.
图13是表示网络信息输出处理的优先度的一个例子的图。FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of priorities in network information output processing.
图14-1是表示显示对象坐标计算处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。FIG. 14-1 is a flowchart showing an example of a display object coordinate calculation processing procedure.
图14-2是表示网络框格配置处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。FIG. 14-2 is a flow chart showing an example of a network grid arrangement processing procedure.
图14-3是表示PLC框格配置处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。FIG. 14-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the PLC grid arrangement process.
图14-4是表示框格尺寸计算处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。FIG. 14-4 is a flowchart showing an example of a cell size calculation processing procedure.
图14-5是表示框格坐标计算处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。FIG. 14-5 is a flowchart showing an example of a grid coordinate calculation processing procedure.
图15是表示网络框格配置处理的结果的图。FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the result of network grid arrangement processing.
图16-1是表示PLC框格配置处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。(其1)。FIG. 16-1 is a flow chart showing an example of the PLC grid layout processing procedure. (its 1).
图16-2是表示PLC框格配置处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。(其2)。FIG. 16-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of PLC grid layout processing. (its 2).
图16-3是表示PLC框格配置处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。(其3)。FIG. 16-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the PLC grid arrangement process. (its 3).
图16-4是表示PLC框格配置处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。(其4)。FIG. 16-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the PLC grid arrangement process. (its 4).
图16-5是表示PLC框格配置处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。(其5)。Fig. 16-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the PLC grid arrangement process. (5 of them).
图17是表示框格尺寸计算结果的一个例子的图。FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of the calculation result of the cell size.
图18是表示框格坐标计算结果的一个例子的图。FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of grid coordinate calculation results.
图19是表示系统结构显示处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of a system configuration display processing procedure.
图20是表示通过系统结构显示处理而在显示部中显示的系统结构信息的一个例子的图。FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of system configuration information displayed on a display unit by system configuration display processing.
图21是表示具有控制系统设计装置的功能的显示器的硬件结构的框图。FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a hardware configuration of a display having the function of a control system design device.
图22-1是示意地表示本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置的网络框格配置功能模块的功能结构的框图。FIG. 22-1 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional structure of the network grid configuration functional module of the control system design device according to the present invention.
图22-2是示意地表示PLC框格配置功能模块的功能结构的框图。FIG. 22-2 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional structure of the PLC grid arrangement functional module.
图23-1是表示本实施方式2所涉及的网络框格配置处理步骤的一个例子的流程图(其1)。FIG. 23-1 is a flowchart (No. 1 ) showing an example of the procedure of the network grid arrangement process according to the second embodiment.
图23-2是表示本实施方式2所涉及的PLC框格配置处理步骤的一个例子的流程图(其2)。FIG. 23-2 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of the procedure of the PLC grid arrangement process according to the second embodiment.
图23-3是表示本实施方式2所涉及的PLC框格配置处理步骤的一个例子的流程图(其3)。FIG. 23-3 is a flowchart (Part 3) showing an example of the procedure of the PLC grid arrangement process according to the second embodiment.
图24是表示本实施方式2所涉及的网络框格配置处理的结果的图。FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the result of the network grid layout process according to the second embodiment.
图25-1是表示本实施方式2所涉及的PLC框格配置处理的步骤的一个例子的图(其1)。FIG. 25-1 is a diagram (No. 1 ) showing an example of the procedure of the PLC grid arrangement process according to the second embodiment.
图25-2是表示本实施方式2所涉及的PLC框格配置处理的步骤的一个例子的图(其2)。FIG. 25-2 is a figure (the 2nd) which shows an example of the procedure of the PLC grid arrangement|positioning process concerning this
图25-3是表示本实施方式2所涉及的PLC框格配置处理的步骤的一个例子的图(其3)。FIG. 25-3 is a figure (the 3rd) which shows an example of the procedure of the PLC grid arrangement|positioning process concerning this
图25-4是表示本实施方式2所涉及的PLC框格配置处理的步骤的一个例子的图(其4)。FIG. 25-4 is a figure (the 4th) which shows an example of the procedure of the PLC grid arrangement|positioning process concerning this
图25-5是表示本实施方式2所涉及的PLC框格配置处理的步骤的一个例子的图(其5)。FIG. 25-5 is a figure (the 5th) which shows an example of the procedure of the PLC grid arrangement|positioning process concerning this
图26是表示相对于图25-5的结果,计算出框格尺寸和框格坐标的结果的图。FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the result of calculation of the grid size and grid coordinates with respect to the results of FIG. 25-5 .
图27是表示通过系统结构显示处理而显示的系统结构信息的一个例子的图。FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of system configuration information displayed by system configuration display processing.
图28是表示控制系统的其它结构例的图。Fig. 28 is a diagram showing another configuration example of the control system.
图29是表示将图28的控制系统以实施方式1的方法进行显示的系统结构的图。FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a system configuration in which the control system of FIG. 28 is displayed by the method of the first embodiment.
图30是表示对于图28的控制系统以实施方式2的方法生成的框格模型的图。FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a grid model generated by the method of
图31是表示基于图30的框格模型显示的图28的控制系统的系统结构的图。FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the system configuration of the control system in FIG. 28 displayed based on the grid model in FIG. 30 .
图32是示意地表示本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置的实施方式3的功能结构的框图。FIG. 32 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional configuration of
图33是表示连接通路显示处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。Fig. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of a connection path display processing procedure.
图34-1是表示在系统结构信息显示画面中的连接通路显示处理的步骤的一个例子的图(其1)。FIG. 34-1 is a diagram (part 1 ) showing an example of a procedure for displaying a connection path on the system configuration information display screen.
图34-2是表示在系统结构信息显示画面中的连接通路显示处理的步骤的一个例子的图(其2)。FIG. 34-2 is a diagram (part 2 ) showing an example of a procedure of connection path display processing on the system configuration information display screen.
图34-3是表示在系统结构信息显示画面中的连接通路显示处理的步骤的一个例子的图(其3)。FIG. 34-3 is a diagram (part 3 ) showing an example of a procedure of connection path display processing on the system configuration information display screen.
图34-4是表示在系统结构信息显示画面中的连接通路显示处理的步骤的一个例子的图(其4)。FIG. 34-4 is a diagram (Part 4 ) showing an example of a procedure of connection path display processing on the system configuration information display screen.
图34-5是表示在系统结构信息显示画面中的连接通路显示处理的步骤的一个例子的图(其5)。FIG. 34-5 is a diagram (part 5 ) showing an example of a procedure of a connection path display process on the system configuration information display screen.
图35是示意地表示本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置的实施方式4的功能结构的框图。FIG. 35 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional configuration of
图36-1是表示脱机连接通路解析处理步骤的一个例子的流程图(其1)。FIG. 36-1 is a flowchart (Part 1) showing an example of an offline connection path analysis processing procedure.
图36-2是表示脱机连接通路解析处理步骤的一个例子的流程图(其2)。FIG. 36-2 is a flowchart (Part 2) showing an example of an offline connection path analysis processing procedure.
图36-3是表示脱机连接通路解析处理步骤的一个例子的流程图(其3)。FIG. 36-3 is a flowchart (Part 3) showing an example of an offline connection path analysis processing procedure.
图37-1是表示保持在脱机连接通路保持部中的连接通路保持信息的一个例子的图(其1)。FIG. 37-1 is a diagram (No. 1 ) showing an example of connected path holding information held in an offline connected path holding unit.
图37-2是表示保持在脱机连接通路保持部中的连接通路保持信息的一个例子的图(其2)。FIG. 37-2 is a diagram (part 2 ) showing an example of connected path holding information held in the offline connected path holding unit.
图37-3是表示保持在脱机连接通路保持部中的连接通路保持信息的一个例子的图(其3)。FIG. 37-3 is a diagram (part 3 ) showing an example of connected path holding information held in the offline connected path holding unit.
图37-4是表示保持在脱机连接通路保持部中的连接通路保持信息的一个例子的图(其4)。FIG. 37-4 is a diagram (Part 4 ) showing an example of connected path holding information held in the offline connected path holding unit.
图37-5是表示保持在脱机连接通路保持部中的连接通路保持信息的一个例子的图(其5)。FIG. 37-5 is a diagram (part 5 ) showing an example of connection path holding information held in the offline connection path holding unit.
图38是表示本实施方式4所涉及的吞吐量模型(throughputmodel)的例子的图。FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a throughput model (throughput model) according to the fourth embodiment.
图39是表示脱机连接通路的显示画面的一个例子的图。FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of an offline connection path.
图40是表示脱机连接通路的显示画面的一个例子的图。FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of an offline connection path.
图41是示意地表示本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置的实施方式5的功能结构的框图。FIG. 41 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional configuration of
图42是表示最佳连接通路计算处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。Fig. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of an optimal connection path calculation processing procedure.
图43-1是表示将PLC 10-1作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其1)。FIG. 43-1 is a diagram (Part 1) showing connection path data in a case where the connection path analysis process is performed with the PLC 10-1 as the starting point PLC.
图43-2是表示将PLC 10-1作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其2)。FIG. 43-2 is a diagram (part 2 ) showing connection path data when connection path analysis processing is performed with the PLC 10 - 1 as the starting point PLC.
图43-3是表示将PLC 10-1作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其3)。FIG. 43-3 is a diagram (Part 3) showing connection path data when connection path analysis processing is performed with the PLC 10-1 as the starting point PLC.
图43-4是表示将PLC 10-1作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其4)。FIG. 43-4 is a diagram (No. 4 ) showing connection path data when the connection path analysis process is performed with the PLC 10-1 as the starting point PLC.
图43-5是表示将PLC 10-1作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其5)。FIG. 43-5 is a diagram (Part 5) showing connection path data when the connection path analysis process is performed with the PLC 10-1 as the starting point PLC.
图44-1是表示将PLC 10-2作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其1)。FIG. 44-1 is a diagram (part 1 ) showing connection path data in a case where connection path analysis processing is performed with the PLC 10-2 as the starting point PLC.
图44-2是表示将PLC 10-2作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其2)。FIG. 44-2 is a diagram (Part 2) showing connection path data in a case where the connection path analysis process is performed with the PLC 10-2 as the starting point PLC.
图44-3是表示将PLC 10-2作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其3)。FIG. 44-3 is a diagram (Part 3) showing connection path data in a case where the connection path analysis process is performed with the PLC 10-2 as the starting point PLC.
图44-4是表示将PLC 10-2作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其4)。FIG. 44-4 is a diagram (No. 4 ) showing connection path data when the connection path analysis process is performed with the PLC 10-2 as the starting point PLC.
图44-5是表示将PLC 10-2作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其5)。FIG. 44-5 is a diagram (part 5 ) showing connection path data when the connection path analysis process is performed with the PLC 10-2 as the starting point PLC.
图45-1是表示将PLC 10-4作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其1)。FIG. 45-1 is a diagram (Part 1) showing connection path data in a case where the connection path analysis process is performed with the PLC 10-4 as the starting point PLC.
图45-2是表示将PLC 10-4作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其2)。FIG. 45-2 is a diagram (Part 2) showing connection path data in a case where the connection path analysis process is performed with the PLC 10-4 as the starting point PLC.
图45-3是表示将PLC 10-4作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其3)。FIG. 45-3 is a diagram (Part 3) showing connection path data in a case where the connection path analysis process is performed with the PLC 10-4 as the starting point PLC.
图45-4是表示将PLC 10-4作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其4)。FIG. 45-4 is a diagram (Part 4) showing connection path data in a case where connection path analysis processing is performed with the PLC 10-4 as the starting point PLC.
图45-5是表示将PLC 10-4作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其5)。FIG. 45-5 is a diagram (part 5 ) showing connection path data when the connection path analysis process is performed with the PLC 10-4 as the starting point PLC.
图46-1是表示将PLC 10-5作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其1)。FIG. 46-1 is a diagram (Part 1) showing connection path data in a case where connection path analysis processing is performed with the PLC 10-5 as the starting point PLC.
图46-2是表示将PLC 10-5作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其2)。Fig. 46-2 is a diagram (part 2) showing connection path data when the connection path analysis process is performed with the PLC 10-5 as the starting point PLC.
图46-3是表示将PLC 10-5作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其3)。FIG. 46-3 is a diagram (Part 3) showing connection path data in a case where the connection path analysis process is performed with the PLC 10-5 as the starting point PLC.
图46-4是表示将PLC 10-5作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其4)。FIG. 46-4 is a diagram (No. 4 ) showing connection path data when the connection path analysis process is performed with the PLC 10-5 as the starting point PLC.
图46-5是表示将PLC 10-5作为起点PLC而实施连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图(其5)。FIG. 46-5 is a diagram (Part 5) showing connection path data in a case where the connection path analysis process is performed with the PLC 10-5 as the starting point PLC.
图47是表示最佳连接通路的显示画面的一个例子的图。FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of an optimal connection path.
图48是表示在控制系统中设定的路由参数的一个例子的图。Fig. 48 is a diagram showing an example of routing parameters set in the control system.
图49是示意地表示本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置的实施方式6的功能结构的框图。FIG. 49 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional configuration of Embodiment 6 of the control system design device according to the present invention.
图50是示意地表示路由参数计算部的功能结构的框图。FIG. 50 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional configuration of a routing parameter calculation unit.
图51-1是表示路由参数计算处理步骤的一个例子的流程图(其1)。FIG. 51-1 is a flowchart (Part 1) showing an example of a routing parameter calculation processing procedure.
图51-2是表示路由参数计算处理步骤的一个例子的流程图(其2)。FIG. 51-2 is a flowchart (Part 2) showing an example of a routing parameter calculation processing procedure.
图52是表示图28的控制系统中的连接至各个PLC的连接通路的一个例子的图。Fig. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a connection path to each PLC in the control system of Fig. 28 .
图53-1是在PLC中设定的路由参数(其1)。Figure 53-1 is the routing parameter (1) set in the PLC.
图53-2是在PLC中设定的路由参数(其2)。Figure 53-2 is the routing parameter (part 2) set in the PLC.
图53-3是在PLC中设定的路由参数(其3)。Figure 53-3 is the routing parameter (part 3) set in the PLC.
图53-4是在PLC中设定的路由参数(其4)。Figure 53-4 is the routing parameter (4) set in the PLC.
图54是示意地表示本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置的实施方式7的功能结构的框图。FIG. 54 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional configuration of Embodiment 7 of the control system design device according to the present invention.
图55-1是表示参数集中改写处理步骤的一个例子的流程图(其1)。FIG. 55-1 is a flowchart (Part 1) showing an example of the procedure of the collective parameter rewriting process.
图55-2是表示参数集中改写处理步骤的一个例子的流程图(其2)。FIG. 55-2 is a flowchart (Part 2) showing an example of the procedure of the collective parameter rewriting process.
图56-1是表示控制系统的结构变更后的路由参数的图(其1)。Fig. 56-1 is a diagram (Part 1) showing routing parameters after the configuration of the control system is changed.
图56-2是表示控制系统的结构变更后的路由参数的图(其2)。Fig. 56-2 is a diagram (Part 2) showing routing parameters after the configuration of the control system is changed.
图56-3是表示控制系统的结构变更后的路由参数的图(其3)。Fig. 56-3 is a diagram (part 3) showing routing parameters after the configuration of the control system is changed.
图56-4是表示控制系统的结构变更后的路由参数的图(其4)。Fig. 56-4 is a diagram (Part 4) showing routing parameters after the configuration of the control system is changed.
图57-1是表示多个网络的参数集中改写处理步骤的一个例子的流程图(其1)。FIG. 57-1 is a flowchart (Part 1) showing an example of a procedure for collectively rewriting parameters of a plurality of networks.
图57-2是表示多个网络的参数集中改写处理步骤的一个例子的流程图(其2)。FIG. 57-2 is a flowchart (Part 2 ) showing an example of a procedure for collectively rewriting parameters of a plurality of networks.
图58-1是表示控制系统的结构变更后的路由参数的图(其1)。Fig. 58-1 is a diagram (Part 1) showing routing parameters after the configuration of the control system is changed.
图58-2是表示控制系统的结构变更后的路由参数的图(其2)。Fig. 58-2 is a diagram (Part 2) showing routing parameters after the configuration of the control system is changed.
图58-3是表示控制系统的结构变更后的路由参数的图(其3)。Fig. 58-3 is a diagram (part 3) showing routing parameters after the configuration of the control system is changed.
图58-4是表示控制系统的结构变更后的路由参数的图(其4)。Fig. 58-4 is a diagram (Part 4) showing routing parameters after the configuration of the control system is changed.
符号的说明Explanation of symbols
10,10-1~10-13 PLC(可编程控制器)10, 10-1~10-13 PLC (programmable logic controller)
11-1A~11-5B 通信单元11-1A~11-5B Communication unit
12-3~12-5 输入输出单元12-3~12-5 Input and output unit
13-3 增设基板13-3 Adding base boards
21 信息系统网络No.321 Information System Network No.3
22A 控制器间网络No.122A inter-controller network No.1
22B 控制器间网络No.222B Inter-controller network No.2
23 现场网络(field network)23 field network
100 控制系统设计装置100 Control system design device
101,155 微处理器101, 155 microprocessor
102,156 数据储存存储器102, 156 data storage memory
103 通信端口103 communication port
104、112、151 显示部104, 112, 151 display unit
105,152 输入部105, 152 input part
106,154 存储部106, 154 Storage Department
107,157 总线107, 157 bus
111 通信部111 Department of Communications
113 起点PLC指定部113 Starting point PLC designation department
114 联机网络结构信息收集部114 Online Network Structure Information Collection Department
115 联机连接通路保持部115 Online Connection Path Maintenance Unit
116 联机网络结构信息保持部116 Online Network Structure Information Maintenance Department
117 显示对象坐标计算部117 Display object coordinate calculation unit
118 系统结构显示部118 System Structure Display Section
119 控制部119 Control Department
120 连接通路显示部120 Connection channel display unit
121 系统结构编辑部121 System Structure Editorial Department
122 脱机网络结构信息保持部122 Offline network structure information retention department
123 连接通路解析选择部123 Connection path analysis selection part
124 吞吐量模型保持部124 Throughput Model Holder
125 脱机连接通路保持部125 Offline connection path maintenance unit
126 最佳连接通路计算部126 Optimal Connection Path Calculation Department
127 路由参数计算部127 Routing parameter calculation department
150 显示器150 monitors
1171 框格模型保持功能模块1171 Sash model retaining function module
1172 网络框格配置功能模块1172 Network grid configuration function module
1173 PLC框格配置功能模块1173 PLC sash configuration function module
1174 框格尺寸计算功能模块1174 Sash size calculation function module
1175 框格坐标计算功能模块1175 Grid coordinate calculation function module
1271 连接通路反转功能模块1271 Connection path inversion function module
1272 传送目标网络序号提取功能模块1272 Transfer target network serial number extraction function module
1273 中继目标网络序号提取功能模块1273 Relay target network serial number extraction function module
1274 中继目标站点序号提取功能模块1274 Relay target site serial number extraction function module
11721 其它网络连接PLC提取单元11721 Other network connection PLC extraction unit
11722 网络类别排序单元11722 Network category sorting unit
11731 PLC框格配置候补提取单元11731 PLC sash configuration alternate extraction unit
11732 PLC框格配置候补选择单元11732 PLC sash configuration alternate selection unit
具体实施方式 Detailed ways
下面,参照附图详细说明本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置的最佳实施方式。此外,本发明并不由这些实施方式所限定。Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the control system designing device according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In addition, this invention is not limited by these embodiment.
实施方式1
在该实施方式1中,针对控制系统设计装置及控制系统设计方法进行说明,其中,该控制系统设计装置从将多个PLC经由网络连接而成的生产设备等的控制系统,在联机状态下收集网络结构信息和连接通路信息,根据这些网络结构信息和连接通路信息,显示构成控制系统的网络结构及PLC的系统结构整体。In this first embodiment, a control system design device and a control system design method will be described, wherein the control system design device collects data in an on-line state from a control system such as a production facility in which a plurality of PLCs are connected via a network. The network structure information and the connection path information display the network structure constituting the control system and the overall system structure of the PLC based on the network structure information and the connection path information.
图1是示意地表示控制系统的网络结构的一个例子的图。该控制系统例如构成生产设备,具有将多个PLC经由网络进行连接的结构。在该例子中,PLC 10-1、10-2与信息系统网络21连接,PLC10-1、10-3、10-4与控制器间网络22A连接,PLC 10-1、10-2、10-5与控制器间网络22B连接,PLC 10-4、10-5与现场网络23连接。另外,在控制器间网络22A的PLC 10-3中,经由USB(Universal Serial Bus)线缆30连接本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置100。FIG. 1 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a network configuration of a control system. This control system constitutes, for example, a production facility, and has a structure in which a plurality of PLCs are connected via a network. In this example, PLCs 10-1, 10-2 are connected to
在这里,所谓信息系统网络是指PLC和个人计算机等信息处理终端共存地进行连接的网络,可以例示出以太网(注册商标)等。另外,控制器间网络是仅PLC彼此连接的网络,现场网络是PLC和伺服电动机等PLC的控制对象共存地进行连接的网络。通常,控制器间网络22由与现场网络23相比通信速度较快的回路构成。另外,可以对信息系统网络21和控制器间网络22赋予网络序号,但无法对现场网络23赋予网络序号。在该图1中,对控制器间网络22A赋予网络序号“No.1”,对控制器间网络22B赋予网络序号“No.2”,对信息系统网络21赋予网络序号“No.3”。Here, the information system network refers to a network in which information processing terminals such as PLCs and personal computers coexist and are connected, and Ethernet (registered trademark) and the like can be exemplified. In addition, the inter-controller network is a network in which only PLCs are connected to each other, and the field network is a network in which PLCs and PLC-controlled objects such as servo motors coexist and are connected. Usually, the
在PLC 10-1的基板上,作为通信单元设置有用于经由控制器间网络22A、22B进行通信的通信单元11-1A、11-1B,和用于经由信息系统网络21进行通信的通信单元11-1C。On the substrate of PLC 10-1, communication units 11-1A, 11-1B for communicating via
在这里,通常将构成网络的PLC称为站点。另外,在控制器间网络中,在站点中,特别是在对控制器间网络的各个站点进行管理的站点中,将对自身站点序号和管理多少站点的信息(总站点数)进行保持的站点称为管理站点。该管理站点在1个控制器间网络中设置1个。此外,在控制器间网络中除管理站点之外的站点中,将保持自身站点序号的站点称为普通站点。另外,用于经由控制器间网络22A、22B进行通信的通信单元11在图中的标示具有以下含义。例如在“M1-3通”的情况下,“M”表示用于经由控制器间网络进行通信的通信单元,“1”表示对控制器间网络赋予的网络序号,连字符“-”后的数字“3”表示控制器间网络中的该PLC(通信单元11)的站点序号,最后的文字表示是管理站点还是普通站点,在管理站点的情况下标示为“管”,在普通站点的情况下标示为“通”。Here, the PLCs constituting the network are generally referred to as stations. In addition, in the inter-controller network, among the stations, especially among the stations that manage each station in the inter-controller network, the station that holds its own station number and information on how many stations it manages (total number of stations) is called for the administration site. This management station is installed in 1 inter-controller network. In addition, among the stations other than the management station in the inter-controller network, the station that keeps its own station number is called a normal station. In addition, the notation in the figure of the communication unit 11 for communicating via the
另外,在用于经由信息系统网络21进行通信的通信单元11在图中的标示、例如“E3-1”中,“E”表示用于经由信息系统网络进行通信的通信单元,“3”表示向信息系统网络赋予的网络序号,连字符“-”后的数字“1”表示信息系统网络中的该PLC(通信单元11)的站点序号。In addition, in the notation of the communication unit 11 for communication via the
由此,通信单元11-1A是与控制器间网络22A作为站点序号3的普通站点进行连接的通信单元,通信单元11-1B是与控制器间网络22B作为站点序号2的普通站点进行连接的通信单元。另外,通信单元E3-1是与信息系统网络21作为站点序号1进行连接的通信单元。Thus, the communication unit 11-1A is a communication unit connected to the
在PLC 10-2的基板上,作为通信单元设置用于经由控制器间网络22B进行通信的通信单元11-2A、和用于经由信息系统网络21进行通信的通信单元11-2B。通信单元11-2A是与控制器间网络22B作为站点序号1的管理站点进行连接的通信单元。另外,通信单元11-2B是与信息系统网络21作为站点序号2进行连接的通信单元。On the substrate of the PLC 10-2, a communication unit 11-2A for communicating via the
在PLC 10-3的基板上,作为通信单元设置用于经由控制器间网络22A进行通信的通信单元11-3。该通信单元11-3是与控制器间网络22A作为站点序号1的管理站点进行连接的通信单元。另外,在PLC 10-3的基板上设置有输入输出(I/O)单元12-3,并且安装有附带2个输入输出单元12-3的增设基板13-3。On the substrate of the PLC 10-3, a communication unit 11-3 for performing communication via the
在PLC 10-4的基板上,除了输入输出单元12-4之外,作为通信单元还设置有用于经由现场网络23进行通信的通信单元11-4A和用于经由控制器间网络22A进行通信的通信单元11-4B。On the substrate of the PLC 10-4, in addition to the input and output unit 12-4, a communication unit 11-4A for communicating via the
在这里,在用于经由现场网络23进行通信的通信单元11在图中的标示、例如“C主站点”中,“C”表示用于经由现场网络进行通信的通信单元,其后的文字表示是主站点还是本地站点,在本地站点的情况下,进一步在其后面附加在现场网络中的该PLC(通信单元11)的站点序号。此外,主站点及本地站点是在现场网络中站点的称呼,主站点相当于控制器间网络的管理站点,本地站点相同地相当于普通站点。Here, in the notation of the communication unit 11 for communication via the
由此,通信单元11-4A是与现场网络23作为主站点进行连接的通信单元,通信单元11-4B是与控制器间网络22A作为站点序号2的普通站点进行连接的通信单元。Accordingly, the communication unit 11 - 4A is a communication unit connected to the
在PLC 10-5的基板中,除了输入输出单元12-5之外,作为通信单元还设置有用于经由现场网络23进行通信的通信单元11-5A、和用于经由控制器间网络22B进行通信的通信单元11-5B。通信单元11-5A是与现场网络23作为站点序号1的本地站点进行连接的通信单元,通信单元11-5B是与控制器间网络22B作为站点序号3的普通站点进行连接的通信单元。In the substrate of the PLC 10-5, in addition to the input and output unit 12-5, a communication unit 11-5A for communicating via the
此外,各PLC保持有包含为了使PLC进行动作而在PLC中设定好的基板信息、与该PLC所属的网络相关的连接网络信息以及程序在内的项目信息。基板信息包括下述信息,即,安装在PLC基板上的单元的数量(槽数量)及安装在基板的各个槽中的单元的种类、与连接在基板上的增设基板相关的信息。另外,连接网络信息包括该PLC所属的网络的类别、网络序号、网络中的站点序号、是管理站点还是普通站点的类别、以及总站点数。此外,在以下的说明中,将上述基板信息和连接网络信息综合后的内容也称为系统结构信息。In addition, each PLC holds item information including board information set in the PLC to operate the PLC, connection network information and programs related to the network to which the PLC belongs. The board information includes the number of units (number of slots) mounted on the PLC board, the type of units mounted in each slot of the board, and information on extension boards connected to the board. In addition, the connected network information includes the type of the network to which the PLC belongs, the network number, the station number in the network, whether it is a management station or a normal station, and the total number of stations. In addition, in the following description, the integrated content of the said board|substrate information and connection network information is also called system configuration information.
图2是示意地表示控制系统设计装置的硬件结构的框图。控制系统设计装置100由个人计算机等信息处理终端构成,其构成为经由总线107连接有:微处理器101,其用于基于程序进行设计工具的处理(即,系统结构的设定及管理的处理);数据储存存储器102,其用于储存伴随该处理产生的临时数据;通信端口103,其用于与PLC10进行通信;显示部104,其用于显示设计工具(树状或图标等的窗口);键盘和鼠标等输入部105;以及硬盘装置等存储部106,其存储由设计工具设定的数据(即,系统结构的设定)。FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the control system design device. The control
在图1的例子中,该控制系统设计装置100经由USB线缆30与PLC 10-3连接。并且,在后述的限制下,对与控制系统相关的PLC数据和连接至各个PLC 10的连接通路等信息进行收集,图形化地显示系统结构。In the example of FIG. 1 , the control
图3是示意地表示本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置的实施方式1的功能结构的框图。该控制系统设计装置100具有通信部111、显示部112、起点PLC指定部113、联机网络结构信息收集部114、联机连接通路保持部115、联机网络结构信息保持部116、显示对象坐标计算部117、系统结构显示部118、以及控制上述各个处理部的控制部119。FIG. 3 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional configuration of
通信部111与构成控制系统的1个PLC连接,进行通信。另外,显示部112是对由系统结构显示部118生成的系统结构信息进行显示的单元。此外,通信部111对应于权利要求书中的通信单元,显示部112相同地对应于显示单元。The
起点PLC指定部113指定该控制系统设计装置100与哪个PLC连接。由该起点PLC指定部113进行的处理,例如可以使用在日本专利第3587099号公报中所记载的内容。此外,起点PLC指定部113对应于权利要求书中的起点控制装置指定单元。The origin
联机网络结构信息收集部114对包括连接网络信息及基板信息的系统结构信息、和作为连接至各个PLC的连接通路的连接通路信息进行收集,其中,该连接网络信息示出以由起点PLC指定部113所指定的PLC作为起点而构成控制系统的PLC所连接的网络,该基板信息示出PLC的系统结构(安装在基板上的单元的结构)。另外,还具有下述功能,即,根据收集到的系统结构信息,生成示出网络结构、即连接在网络上的PLC的网络信息。另外,将收集到的连接网络信息和基板信息作为PLC数据,将生成的网络作为网络数据,储存在联机网络结构信息保持部116中,将收集到的连接通路信息储存在联机连接通路保持部115中。此外,该联机网络结构信息收集部114对应于权利要求书中的联机网络结构信息收集单元。The online network configuration
联机连接通路保持部115保持在联机网络结构信息收集部114的处理中所使用的、作为连接至各个PLC的连接通路的连接通路信息。连接通路信息示出从与该控制系统设计装置100连接的PLC向某个PLC访问时的通信通路。The online connection
联机网络结构信息保持部116将由联机网络结构信息收集部114收集到的连接网络信息及基板信息、和由联机网络结构信息收集部114生成的网络信息,作为网络结构信息进行保持。如上所述,连接网络信息是示出与构成控制系统的PLC连接的网络的信息,基板信息是示出与各PLC安装在相同基板上的单元的数量(槽数量)、种类及其属性、连接在该基板上的增设基板和安装在该增设基板上的单元数量、种类及其属性的信息。另外,网络信息是包含构成网络的PLC及其通信单元中所设定的属性在内的信息。The on-line network configuration
显示对象坐标计算部117对保持在联机网络结构信息保持部116中的网络结构信息进行读取,并分析其内容,计算各个显示对象(以下简称为对象)的坐标,以用于显示构成控制系统的网络及PLC的系统结构整体。该显示对象坐标计算部117对应于权利要求书中的显示对象坐标计算单元。The display object coordinate
系统结构显示部118基于由显示对象坐标计算部117计算出的坐标,使显示对象在显示部112中显示。该系统结构显示部118对应于权利要求书中的系统结构显示单元。The system
在这里,对于显示对象坐标计算部117进一步进行详细说明。显示对象坐标计算部117具有下述功能,即,作为最终计算出由系统结构显示部118进行显示处理的对象的坐标之前的中间阶段,根据框格模型计算配置信息。Here, the display object coordinate
该框格模型是指利用矩形格表示对象间的配置关系的模型。在这里,作为框格模型使用网络框格、PLC框格、以及配线框格这3种框格。The sash model is a model in which a rectangular lattice is used to represent an arrangement relationship between objects. Here, three types of grids, a network grid, a PLC grid, and a wiring grid, are used as grid models.
网络框格是表示网络的矩形格(框格)。在网络框格的左右不配置其他框格,在存在多个网络框格的情况下,将网络框格进行上下配置。A network pane is a rectangular grid (sash) that represents a network. No other panes are arranged on the left and right of the network pane, and when there are multiple network panes, the network panes are arranged up and down.
PLC框格是表示PLC的矩形格(框格)。PLC框格在PLC所连接的网络的网络框格下方,与后述的配线框格一起配置。该PLC框格对应于权利要求书中的控制装置框格。The PLC grid is a rectangular grid (sash) representing a PLC. The PLC grid is located below the network grid of the network to which the PLC is connected, and is placed together with the wiring grid described later. This PLC pane corresponds to the control device pane in the claims.
配线框格是表示用于将PLC和网络之间进行连接的配线的矩形格(框格)。配线框格配置在网络框格和PLC框格之间,形成为从PLC框格必定只向上方延伸。The wiring grid is a rectangular grid (sash) representing wiring for connecting the PLC to the network. The wiring grid is disposed between the network grid and the PLC grid, and is formed so as to necessarily extend only upward from the PLC grid.
另外,除此之外,使位于所追加的PLC框格上部的的整个网络框格横向延伸,以包括所追加的下部PLC框格。Also, in addition to this, the entire network grid above the added PLC grid is extended horizontally to include the added lower PLC grid.
接着,说明框格模型的具体例子。图4-1~图7-4是表示控制系统的结构的一个例子、和与其对应的框格模型的一个例子的图。在图4-2中,将与图4-1所示的网络No.1连接的PLC 3以框格模型表示。如该图4-2所示,在网络框格1的下方配置PLC框格3,从该PLC框格3朝向网络框格1配置配线框格。Next, a specific example of the lattice model will be described. FIGS. 4-1 to 7-4 are diagrams showing an example of a structure of a control system and an example of a grid model corresponding thereto. In Figure 4-2, the
在如图5-1所示的PLC 3与网络No.1、No.2这2个网络连接的情况下,其框格模型如图5-2所示,从PLC框格3与上下配置的网络框格1和网络框格2相对地向上方配置配线框格。In the case that
在如图6-1所示的2个PLC 3、4与1个网络No.1连接的情况下,其框格模型如图6-2所示,从左右并列配置的2个PLC框格3、4分别朝向网络框格1配置配线框格。此时,由于如图6-1所示,在网络框格No.1上连接有2个PLC 3、4,所以在图6-2中,网络框格1形成为向左右方向延伸的形状,以包括2个PLC框格3、4。In the case where two
在如图7-1或图7-2所示,PLC 3与网络No.1连接,PLC 4与网络No.2连接,PLC 5与2个网络No.1、No.2连接的情况下,其框格模型成为如图7-3或者7-4所示的形状。即,由于存在2个网络No.1、No.2,所以沿上下方向配置2个网络框格1、2。在这里,网络框格1配置在网络框格2的上方。另外,由于PLC 3仅与网络No.1连接,所以PLC框格3配置在网络框格1和网络框格2之间,从PLC框格1朝向网络框格1配置配线框格。另外,由于PLC 4仅与网络No.2连接,所以PLC框格4配置在网络框格2的下方,从PLC框格4朝向网络框格2配置配线框格。另外,由于PLC 5与网络No.1、No.2这两者连接,所以PLC框格5配置在网络框格2的下方,朝向网络框格1和网络框格2配置配线框格。另外,网络框格1形成向左右方向延伸的形状以包括PLC框格3、5,网络框格2形成向左右方向延伸的形状以包括PLC框格4、5。As shown in Figure 7-1 or Figure 7-2, when
在这样的框格模型规则下,显示对象坐标计算部117计算对象的坐标,该对象构成由系统结构显示部118使用框格进行显示处理的控制系统。Under such grid model rules, the display object coordinate
图8是示意地表示显示对象坐标计算部的功能结构的框图。如该图所示,显示对象坐标计算部117具有框格模型保持功能模块1171、网络框格配置功能模块1172、PLC框格配置功能模块1173、框格尺寸计算功能模块1174及框格坐标计算功能模块1175。FIG. 8 is a block diagram schematically showing a functional configuration of a display object coordinate calculation unit. As shown in the figure, the display object coordinate
框格模型保持功能模块1171对包含通过网络框格配置功能模块1172和PLC框格配置功能模块1173进行配置的框格模型、和通过框格尺寸计算功能模块1174计算出的框格尺寸在内的框格模型进行保持。The sash model holding
网络框格配置功能模块1172将保持在联机网络结构信息保持部116中的网络结构信息进行读取,根据该内容解析网络间的配置关系,计算并配置网络的框格模型。将其结果储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中。The network grid
PLC框格配置功能模块1173将在联机网络结构信息保持部116中保持的网络结构信息进行读取,根据该内容解析PLC与该网络之间的连接关系,计算并配置PLC和配线的框格模型。此时,针对通过网络框格配置功能模块1172计算出并储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中的框格模型,配置PLC框格和配线框格。然后,将其结果储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中。此外,该PLC框格配置功能模块1173对应于权利要求书中的控制装置框格配置功能模块。The PLC grid
框格尺寸计算功能模块1174针对保持在框格模型保持功能模块1171中的框格模型中的各个框格、特别是PLC框格,使用联机网络结构信息保持部116中对应的PLC的基板信息,计算PLC的显示所需的尺寸。在这里,所使用的框格模型是指配置了网络框格、PLC框格和配线框格的框格模型。另外,作为基板信息,利用在对应的PLC基板上安装的单元的个数及其种类、有无增设基板、和安装在该增设基板上的单元的个数及其种类。然后,将其结果添加在框格模型保持功能模块1171中的框格模型中而进行储存。The sash size
框格坐标计算功能模块1175对于保持在框格模型保持功能模块1171中的包括框格尺寸在内的框格模型中的PLC框格,从左上的PLC框格开始顺次加上框格尺寸而计算框格坐标。然后,将计算出的结果与框格模型一起向系统结构显示部118输出。The grid coordinate
下面,对于在具有上述结构的控制系统设计装置100中,从网络结构信息的收集处理至系统结构信息的显示处理顺次进行说明。Next, in the control
(网络结构信息收集处理)(collection and processing of network structure information)
(1)处理的概要(1) Outline of processing
图9-1~图9-3是表示网络结构信息收集处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。首先,控制系统设计装置100的使用者,通过起点PLC指定部113指定该控制系统设计装置100与哪个PLC连接(步骤S11)。由于此时被指定的PLC成为对网络结构信息进行收集的起点,所以称为起点PLC。FIGS. 9-1 to 9-3 are flowcharts showing an example of a procedure for collecting network configuration information. First, the user of the control
联机网络结构信息收集部114在被指定的起点PLC所保持的项目信息中读出系统结构信息(步骤S12)。另外,同时,由联机网络结构信息收集部114对连接至该起点PLC的连接通路进行输出(步骤S13),作为连接通路信息储存在联机连接通路保持部115中。The online network configuration
接着,联机网络结构信息收集部114从在步骤S12中读出的系统结构信息中,提取基板信息和连接网络信息(步骤S14),将它们作为PLC数据而向联机网络结构信息保持部116输出(步骤S15)。然后,联机网络结构信息收集部114选择起点PLC作为处理对象PLC(步骤S16),执行图9-2所示的A1处理(步骤S17)。Next, the on-line network configuration
图9-2是表示在图9-1的步骤S17中的A1处理的步骤的流程图。首先,联机网络结构信息收集部114判定是否针对起点PLC所连接的所有网络,执行了图9-3所示的A2处理(步骤S31)。在对与作为对象的PLC连接的所有网络进行了A2处理的情况(在步骤S31中为是的情况)下,结束A1处理,返回图9-1的流程图。FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the A1 process in step S17 in FIG. 9-1 . First, the online network configuration
另外,在没有对与作为对象的PLC连接的全部网络进行A2处理的情况(在步骤S31中为否的情况)下,对是否可以针对各个网络继续进行信息收集进行判定(步骤S32)。对于可否执行该网络的信息收集处理的判定,是基于预先定义的针对可以进行网络的信息收集处理的范围作出的限制而进行的。另外,在针对各个网络可以继续进行信息收集的情况(在步骤S32中为是的情况)下,从还未执行图9-3的A2处理的网络中选择1个网络作为处理对象的网络(步骤S33),针对该网络,执行图9-3所示的网络信息输出处理(步骤S34)。Moreover, when the A2 process has not been performed on all the networks connected to the target PLC (NO in step S31 ), it is determined whether information collection can be continued for each network (step S32 ). Whether or not the network information collection process can be executed is determined based on a previously defined limit on the range in which the network information collection process can be performed. In addition, when information collection can be continued for each network (YES in step S32), one network is selected as the network to be processed from the networks that have not yet executed the A2 process in FIG. 9-3 (step S32). S33 ), for the network, execute the network information output process shown in FIG. 9-3 (step S34 ).
然后,对是否存在尚未进行A2处理的网络进行判定(步骤S35),在存在尚未进行A2处理的网络的情况(在步骤S35中为是的情况)下,返回至步骤S33,重复执行上述处理。另一方面,在不存在尚未进行A2处理的网络的情况(在步骤S35中为否的情况)下,结束A1处理,处理返回图9-1。Then, it is determined whether there is a network that has not undergone the A2 process (step S35 ), and if there is a network that has not undergone the A2 process (Yes in step S35 ), return to step S33 and execute the above-mentioned process repeatedly. On the other hand, when there is no network that has not been subjected to the A2 process (NO in step S35 ), the A1 process ends, and the process returns to FIG. 9-1 .
另外,在步骤S32中,在无法对各个网络继续进行信息收集的情况(在步骤S32中为否的情况)下,利用已输出的PLC数据生成网络信息,将其作为网络数据输出至联机网络结构信息保持部116(步骤S36)。该网络信息是针对各个网络而将构成该网络的PLC和在该PLC中所设定的信息进行汇总而得到的。In addition, in step S32, when information collection cannot be continued for each network (in the case of NO in step S32), network information is generated using the output PLC data, and is output as network data to the online network structure The information holding unit 116 (step S36). This network information is obtained by summarizing, for each network, PLCs constituting the network and information set in the PLCs.
图9-3是表示在图9-2的步骤S34中的A2处理的步骤的一个例子的流程图。在该A2处理中,联机网络结构信息收集部114首先从与网络连接的管理站点(控制器间网络的情况下)或者主站点(现场网络的情况下)的PLC所保持的项目信息中,读取系统结构信息(步骤S51)。然后,从读出的系统结构信息的连接网络信息中提取总站点数(步骤S52)。FIG. 9-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the A2 process in step S34 of FIG. 9-2. In this A2 process, the online network structure
然后,联机网络结构信息收集部114从与网络连接的各个PLC所保持的项目信息中读出系统结构信息(步骤S53)。接着,从读出的系统结构信息中提取基板信息和连接网络信息(步骤S54),利用这些信息生成将针对构成该网络的PLC的设定信息汇总而得到的网络信息,作为网络数据向联机网络结构信息保持部116输出(步骤S55)。Then, the online network configuration
接着,联机网络结构信息收集部114判定是否对应于信息收集到的所有PLC,都输出了数据(步骤S56)。在对应于所有PLC都输出了数据的情况(在步骤S56中为是的情况)下,结束与作为对象的网络相关的A2处理,返回至图9-2的A1处理。另外,在尚未对应于所有PLC都输出了数据的情况(在步骤S56中为否的情况)下,将连接至各个PLC的连接通路向联机连接通路保持部115输出(步骤S57),并向联机网络结构信息保持部116输出在步骤S54中提取的各个PLC的PLC数据(步骤S58)。Next, the online network configuration
接着,基于规定的限制,对是否可以对各个PLC针对网络继续进行信息收集进行判定(步骤S59)。在可以对网络进行信息收集的情况(在步骤S59中为是的情况)下,将未实施图9-2所示的A1处理的PLC选择作为处理对象PLC(步骤S60),执行图9-2所示的A1处理(步骤S61)。然后,对是否存在尚未进行A1处理的PLC进行判定(步骤S62),在存在尚未进行A1处理的PLC的情况(在步骤S62中为是的情况)下,返回步骤S60,重复执行上述处理。另外,在不存在尚未进行A1处理的PLC的情况(在步骤S62中为否的情况)下,结束A2处理。此外,在步骤S59中无法对网络进行信息收集的情况(在步骤S59中为否的情况)下,也结束A2处理。Next, based on predetermined restrictions, it is determined whether or not information collection can be continued for each PLC with respect to the network (step S59 ). When it is possible to collect information on the network (Yes in step S59), select the PLC that has not implemented the A1 process shown in Figure 9-2 as the processing target PLC (step S60), and execute Figure 9-2 A1 processing shown (step S61). Then, it is determined whether there is a PLC that has not yet performed the A1 process (step S62 ), and if there is a PLC that has not yet performed the A1 process (YES in step S62 ), the process returns to step S60 and the above processing is repeatedly executed. Moreover, when there is no PLC which has not performed A1 process yet (it is NO in step S62), A2 process is complete|finished. In addition, also in the case where it was not possible to collect information on the network in step S59 (NO in step S59 ), the process of A2 is terminated.
然后,返回至图9-1,在步骤S17的A1处理之后,联机网络结构信息收集部114对输出的数据的整合性进行处理(步骤S18)。作为该数据的整合性处理,可以例举出下述处理等,即,针对同一个网络,在根据限制而在联机网络结构信息保持部116中存在2份网络数据的情况下,进行处理,以将这2份数据进行汇总而形成1份针对网络的网络数据。由此,网络结构信息收集处理完成。Then, returning to FIG. 9-1, after the A1 process of step S17, the online network structure
根据以上所述的处理,在联机连接通路保持部115中,储存了从控制系统设计装置100所连接的PLC至可以进行信息收集的网络的各个PLC为止的连接通路信息,在联机网络结构信息保持部116中,储存了包含与可以进行信息收集的网络的各个PLC相关的连接网络信息和基板信息、以及由各个PLC构成的网络信息在内的网络结构信息。According to the processing described above, in the online connection
(2)处理的具体例子(2) Specific examples of processing
由于上述的说明记述了网络结构信息收集处理的概要,所以例举具有图1的结构的控制系统的情况,对该处理的具体例子如下进行说明。图10是表示通过网络结构信息收集处理而保持在联机连接通路保持部中的连接通路信息的一个例子的图,图11是表示相同地储存在联机网络结构信息储存部中的网络结构信息的一个例子的图。此外,在上述图10和图11中,以数据生成的顺序进行表示。另外,在这些图中,网络并非以图1所示的标号而是以“网络种类+网络序号”的形式进行标示。Since the above description describes the outline of the network configuration information collection process, the case of the control system having the configuration of FIG. 1 is taken as an example, and a specific example of this process will be described below. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of connection path information stored in an online connection path holding unit through network configuration information collection processing, and FIG. 11 is an example of network configuration information similarly stored in an online network configuration information storage unit. Example diagram. In addition, in the said FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, it shows in order of data generation. In addition, in these figures, the network is not marked with the label shown in Figure 1 but in the form of "network type + network serial number".
如图10所示,连接通路信息包含表示所储存的数据种类的“数据类别”、成为终点PLC的“名称”、“起点PLC”、表示作为中途通路的网络或者节点(PLC)的“数据1”、“数据2”、…。在这里,n为自然数,在“数据(2n-1)”栏中写入的是网络,在“数据(2n)”的栏中写入的是PLC。As shown in FIG. 10, the connection path information includes "data type" indicating the type of stored data, "name" of the destination PLC, "start point PLC", and "
另外,如图11所示,网络结构信息包含表示所储存的数据类别的“数据类别”、表示作为对象的PLC的“名称”、和表示针对该PLC而按照每个数据种类所规定的内容的“数据1”、“数据2”、…。由于如上所述,网络结构信息由基板信息、连接网络信息及网络信息这3种构成,所以随着这些数据种类的不同,所储存的数据的内容不同。In addition, as shown in FIG. 11 , the network configuration information includes "data type" indicating the type of stored data, "name" indicating the target PLC, and "name" indicating the content specified for each data type for the PLC. "
例如,在储存基板信息的情况下,在数据类别中储存“PLC基板”,在各个数据栏中储存安装在各个槽中的单元的类别。在具有增设基板的情况下,还储存安装在增设基板的各个槽中的单元的类别。另外,在储存连接网络信息的情况下,在数据类别中储存“PLC网络”,在各个数据栏中,储存与在“名称”中示出的PLC的基板上所安装的各个通信单元相关的信息。另外,在储存网络信息的情况下,在数据类别中储存“网络”,在各个数据栏中,储存与构成在“名称”中示出的网络的PLC的通信单元相关的信息。在这里,以站点序号顺次储存。For example, when storing board information, "PLC board" is stored in the data type, and the type of the unit mounted in each slot is stored in each data column. In the case of an add-on base, the types of units mounted in the respective slots of the add-on base are also stored. In addition, when storing connection network information, "PLC network" is stored in the data category, and information related to each communication unit mounted on the PLC board shown in "Name" is stored in each data column. . Moreover, when storing network information, "network" is stored in the data category, and information about the communication unit of PLC which comprises the network shown by "name" is stored in each data column. Here, they are stored sequentially by site number.
(2-1)对于起点PLC(2-1) For the starting point PLC
在图1中,由于控制系统设计装置100与PLC 10-3连接,所以,首先使用者通过控制系统设计装置100的起点PLC指定部113,将PLC 10-3指定为起点PLC。其后,联机网络结构信息收集部114从经由USB线缆30而连接的起点PLC所保持的项目信息中,读出系统结构信息,并且将连接至起点PLC的连接通路P3c向联机连接通路保持部115输出。In FIG. 1 , since the control
在这里,在读出的系统结构信息中,作为基板信息包括下述信息,即,在槽1中安装有CPU单元,在槽2中安装有I/O单元12-3,在槽3中安装有控制器间网络单元11-3,在增设基板13-3的槽1、2中分别安装有I/O单元12-3。另外,作为连接网络信息包括以下信息,即,网络类别为控制器间网络No.1,控制器间网络单元11-3是站点序号为1的管理站点,控制器间网络No.1的总站点数为3。Here, in the read system configuration information, the following information is included as the board information, that is, the CPU unit is mounted in the
由此,联机网络结构信息收集部114将图10的连接通路P3c所示的内容作为连接通路信息向联机连接通路保持部115输出,将图11中所示的PLC数据P3b、P3n所示的内容向联机网络结构信息保持部116输出。另外,将起点PLC即PLC 10-3选择作为处理对象,执行图9-2所示的A1处理。Thus, the online network structure
(2-2)与PLC 10-3连接的网络(2-2) Network connected to PLC 10-3
在将PLC 10-3作为处理对象的图9-2的A1处理中,对于与PLC 10-3连接的控制器间网络No.1(22A),由于尚未执行图9-3的A2处理,所以对是否可以向网络继续进行信息收集的限制进行确认。图12是表示向网络进行信息收集的限制的一个例子的图。由于与图1的PLC 10-3连接的网络即控制器间网络No.1(22A)不符合图12的任一个限制,所以联机网络结构信息收集部114将控制器间网络No.1(22A)选择作为A2处理的对象,执行图9-3所示的A2处理。In process A1 of Fig. 9-2, which targets PLC 10-3, the inter-controller network No. 1 (22A) connected to PLC 10-3 has not yet executed process A2 of Fig. 9-3. Check whether or not to continue to limit the collection of information to the network. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of restrictions on information collection from the network. Since the network connected to the PLC 10-3 in FIG. 1, that is, the inter-controller network No. 1 (22A) does not meet any of the restrictions in FIG. 12, the online network structure
(2-3)对于控制器间网络No.1(2-3) For inter-controller network No.1
在将控制器间网络No.1(22A)作为处理对象的图9-3的A2处理中,首先,联机网络结构信息收集部114从与控制器间网络No.1连接的管理站点即PLC 10-3所保持的项目信息中,读出系统结构信息。但是,在这里,由于已经输出了PLC 10-3的系统结构信息中的图11中的PLC数据P3b、P3n,所以无需再次读出。由此,由于在管理站点PLC(即PLC 10-3)的系统结构信息中的连接网络信息P3n中,包含与控制器间网络No.1连接的PLC的总站点数相关的信息,所以提取总站点数“3”。In the process A2 of Fig. 9-3 where inter-controller network No. 1 (22A) is the processing target, first, the online network structure
然后,联机网络结构信息收集部114以“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→各站点”的通路,从各个站点序号的PLC所保持的对象信息中读出系统结构信息。即,在这里,新收集PLC 10-4和PLC 10-1的信息。Then, the on-line network configuration
然后,联机网络结构信息收集部114根据这些提取到的信息生成网络信息,作为网络数据M1向联机网络结构信息保持部116输出。即,联机网络结构信息收集部114利用已储存在联机网络结构信息保持部116中的与PLC 10-3的通信单元11-3相关的信息、和提取到的与PLC 10-4、10-1的通信单元11-1A、11-4B相关的信息,生成图11的网络数据M1所示的针对控制器间网络No.1的网络信息。Then, the online network configuration
然后,联机网络结构信息收集部114针对新收集到的与PLC 10-4、10-1相关的数据中的所有数据,对是否向联机连接通路保持部115或者联机网络结构信息保持部116输出了数据进行判定。在这里,PLC 10-4、10-1任一个的数据都尚未向联机连接通路保持部115和联机网络结构信息保持部116输出。由此,将对PLC 10-4、10-1各自进行读出的通路分别作为连接通路P4c、P1c,向联机连接通路保持部115输出,将各个PLC 10-4、10-1的PLC数据分别作为基板信息P4b、P1b及连接网络信息P4n、P1n,向联机网络结构信息保持部116输出。Then, the online network structure
然后,联机网络结构信息收集部114判定是否可以对进行信息收集后的PLC 10-4、10-1针对网络继续进行信息收集。此外,在这里,对是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集实施判定的PLC为PLC10-4(站点序号2)和PLC 10-1(站点序号3),从哪一个PLC开始进行处理均可。即,不存在处理的优先度。在该例子中,设为以站点序号顺序进行处理,在针对站点序号2的PLC 10-4的处理结束后,进行针对站点序号3的PLC 10-1的处理。Then, the online network configuration
(2-4)PLC 10-4(2-4) PLC 10-4
首先,对于PLC 10-4,根据图12所示的限制来确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。由于PLC 10-4不符合图12的限制,所以将PLC 10-4选择作为处理对象,执行图9-2的A1处理。First, for PLC 10-4, confirm whether information collection can continue for the network according to the restrictions shown in Fig. 12. Since PLC 10-4 does not comply with the restrictions in Figure 12, PLC 10-4 is selected as the processing object, and A1 processing in Figure 9-2 is performed.
(2-4-1)A1处理(2-4-1) A1 treatment
在将PLC 10-4作为处理对象的A1处理中,在PLC 10-4所连接的网络中,控制器间网络No.1的数据已经作为网络数据M1输出至联机网络结构信息保持部116中,并执行了A2处理,但是对于现场网络23尚未执行A2处理。由此,联机网络结构信息收集部114对于现场网络23,利用图12来确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集的限制。在这里,由于并不符合限制,所以将现场网络23选择作为处理对象,执行图9-3的A2处理。In the A1 process with PLC 10-4 as the processing target, in the network connected to PLC 10-4, the data of inter-controller network No. 1 has already been output to the online network configuration
(2-4-2)A2处理(2-4-2) A2 treatment
然后,在将现场网络23作为处理对象的A2处理中,从与现场网络23连接的主站点PLC即PLC 10-4所保持的项目信息中,读出系统结构信息。但是,由于在PLC 10-4的系统结构信息中,基板信息P4b和连接网络信息P4n的数据已经输出,所以无需再次读出。由此,根据已经输出的主站点PLC 10-4的系统结构信息的连接网络信息P4n,提取与现场网络23连接的PLC的总站点数“2”。Then, in the A2 processing which takes the
然后,联机网络结构信息收集部114以“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-4→现场网络23→各站点”的通路,从各个站点序号的PLC所保持的项目信息中读出系统结构信息。即,在这里,新收集PLC 10-5的信息。Then, the on-line network configuration
(2-4-3)现场网络23→PLC 10-5(2-4-3)
在新读取的PLC 10-5的系统结构信息中,作为基板信息包含下述信息,即,在槽1中具有CPU单元,在槽2中具有I/O单元12-5,在槽3中具有用于经由现场网络23进行通信的通信单元11-5A,在槽4中具有用于经由控制器间网络22B进行通信的通信单元11-5B。另外,作为连接网络信息,包含现场网络23、本地站点1这样的信息,以及控制器间网络No.2、站点序号3、普通站点这样的信息。并且,联机网络结构信息收集部114根据这些提取的系统结构信息和已经输出的与PLC 10-4相关的系统结构信息,生成与现场网络23相关的网络信息,作为图11所示的网络数据C向联机网络结构信息保持部116输出。In the newly read system configuration information of PLC 10-5, the following information is included as board information, that is, there is a CPU unit in
接着,联机网络结构信息收集部114针对新信息收集到的PLC10-5,对是否向联机连接通路保持部115或者联机网络结构信息保持部116输出了数据进行判定。在这里,由于尚未输出PLC 10-5的数据,所以将进行了读出的通路作为连接通路P5c向联机连接通路保持部115输出,将PLC数据作为基板信息P5b及连接网络信息P5n向联机网络结构信息保持部116输出。Next, the online network configuration
其后,联机网络结构信息收集部114针对进行了信息收集的PLC10-5,基于图12的限制而确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。在这里,由于符合限制B,所以结束将现场网络23作为处理对象的A2处理。另外,结束(2-4)的将PLC 10-4作为处理对象的A1处理。Then, the online network structure
(2-5)PLC 10-1(2-5) PLC 10-1
接着,针对PLC 10-1,根据图12所示的限制而确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。对于PLC 10-1,由于不符合图12的限制,所以将PLC 10-1选择作为处理对象,执行图9-2的A1处理。Next, regarding PLC 10-1, it is confirmed whether or not information collection can be continued with respect to the network according to the restrictions shown in FIG. 12 . For PLC 10-1, because it does not meet the restrictions in Figure 12, PLC 10-1 is selected as the processing object, and A1 processing in Figure 9-2 is executed.
在将PLC 10-1作为处理对象的A1处理中,在PLC 10-1所连接的网络中,控制器间网络No.2和信息系统网络No.3都尚未执行A2处理。由此,联机网络结构信息收集部114基于根据规定基准而设定的优先度,选择作为处理对象的PLC,并进行处理。图13是表示网络信息输出处理的优先度的一个例子的图。在该例子中,将与PLC进行连接的可能性最高的控制器间网络22A、22B设定为最高的处理优先度,按照现场网络23、信息系统网络21的顺序而处理的优先度降低。In the A1 process with the PLC 10-1 as the processing target, the A2 process has not yet been executed in the inter-controller network No. 2 and the information system network No. 3 in the network connected to the PLC 10-1. Thereby, the online network structure
(2-6)控制器间网络No.2(2-6) Network between controllers No.2
联机网络结构信息收集部114按照图13的优先度选择控制器间网络No.2,利用图12对是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集的限制进行确认。在这里,由于不符合限制,所以将控制器间网络No.2作为处理对象,执行图9-3的A2处理。The online network configuration
在将该控制器间网络No.2作为处理对象的A2处理中,联机网络结构信息收集部114从与控制器间网络No.2连接的管理站点即PLC 10-2所保持的项目信息中,读出系统结构信息。由于在该系统结构信息中的连接网络信息中,包含与控制器间网络No.2连接的PLC的总站点数相关的信息,所以提取总站点数“3”。In the A2 process in which the inter-controller network No. 2 is the processing target, the online network configuration
其后,联机网络结构信息收集部114以“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→控制器间网络No.2→各站点”的通路,从各个站点序号的PLC所保持的项目信息中读出系统结构信息。即,在这里,收集PLC 10-2、10-5的信息。Thereafter, the on-line network configuration
在新读出的PLC 10-2的系统结构信息中,作为基板信息包含下述信息,即,在槽1中具有CPU单元,在槽3中具有用于经由控制器间网络No.2进行通信的通信单元11-2A,在槽2中具有用于经由信息系统网络No.3进行通信的通信单元11-2B。另外,作为连接网络信息包含控制器间网络No.2、站点序号1、管理站点这样的信息,和信息系统网络No.3、站点序号2、IP地址这样的信息。In the newly read system configuration information of PLC 10-2, the following information is included as the board information, that is, there is a CPU unit in
另外,在PLC 10-5的系统结构信息中,作为基板信息包含下述信息,即,在槽1中具有CPU单元,在槽2中具有I/O单元12-5,在槽3中具有用于经由现场网络23进行通信的通信单元11-5A,在槽4中具有用于经由控制器间网络No.2进行通信的通信单元11-5B。另外,作为连接网络信息储存有现场网络、本地站点1这样的信息,和控制器间网络No.2、站点序号3、普通站点这样的信息。In addition, in the system configuration information of PLC 10-5, the following information is included as board information, that is, there is a CPU unit in
并且,联机网络结构信息收集部114根据这些提取到的系统信息、和已经储存在联机网络结构信息保持部116中的与PLC 10-1相关的PLC数据,生成针对控制器间网络No.2的网络信息,作为网络信息M2向联机网络结构信息保持部116输出。In addition, the online network configuration
接着,在新通过信息收集获得的系统结构信息中,PLC 10-5的数据已经进行了数据输出,但PLC 10-2的数据尚未输出。由此,将对PLC 10-2进行了读出的通路作为连接通路P2c,向联机连接通路保持部115输出,将PLC数据作为基板信息P2b及连接网络信息P2n,向联机网络结构信息保持部116输出。Next, in the system structure information newly obtained through information collection, the data of PLC 10-5 has been outputted, but the data of PLC 10-2 has not been outputted yet. Thus, the path read by the PLC 10-2 is output to the online connection
(2-7)PLC 10-2(2-7) PLC 10-2
其后,对于PLC 10-2,根据图12所示的限制而确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。由于PLC 10-2不符合图12的限制,所以将PLC 10-2选择作为处理对象,执行图9-2的A1处理。Thereafter, with regard to the PLC 10-2, it is confirmed whether or not information collection can be continued with respect to the network according to the restrictions shown in FIG. 12 . Since PLC 10-2 does not comply with the restrictions in Figure 12, PLC 10-2 is selected as the processing object, and A1 processing in Figure 9-2 is executed.
在将PLC 10-2作为处理对象的A1处理中,尚未针对PLC 10-2所连接的网络中的信息系统网络No.3执行A2处理。由此,联机网络结构信息收集部114根据图12的限制,确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。在这里,由于符合限制C,所以没有可以进行信息收集的网络。由此,利用PLC 10-2的PLC数据,针对信息系统网络No.3在能够生成的范围内生成网络信息,作为网络数据E3-2向联机网络结构信息保持部116输出。由此,结束将PLC 10-2作为处理对象的A1处理。另外,结束(2-6)的将控制器间网络No.2作为处理对象的A2处理。In the A1 process with the PLC 10-2 as the processing target, the A2 process has not yet been executed for the information system network No. 3 in the network to which the PLC 10-2 is connected. Thereby, the online network configuration
(2-8)信息系统网络No.3(2-8) Information system network No.3
接着,对于信息系统网络No.3,根据图12所示的限制来确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。由于信息系统网络21符合限制C,所以针对信息系统网络No.3在能够生成的范围内生成网络信息,作为网络数据E3-1向联机网络结构信息保持部116输出。由此,结束(2-5)的将PLC 10-1作为处理对象的A2处理。另外,结束(2-2)的将PLC 10-3作为处理对象的A1处理。Next, for information system network No. 3, it is checked whether information collection can be continued for the network based on the restrictions shown in FIG. 12 . Since the
其后,联机网络结构信息收集部114对输出的数据的整合性进行处理。在该例子中,通过是否可以对网络继续进行信息收集的图12的限制C,使与信息系统网络No.3相关的网络数据如图11所示,作为网络数据E3-1和E3-2分别输出。由此,进行将它们进行汇总而形成网络数据E3的处理。由此网络结构信息收集处理完成。Thereafter, the online network structure
(PLC框格配置处理)(PLC grid configuration processing)
(1)处理的概要(1) Outline of processing
图14-1~图14-5是表示显示对象坐标计算处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。此外,在以下的说明中,利用上述框格模型进行显示对象的坐标计算处理。14-1 to 14-5 are flowcharts showing an example of a display object coordinate calculation processing procedure. In addition, in the following description, coordinate calculation processing of a display object is performed using the above-mentioned lattice model.
参照图14-1,说明显示对象坐标计算处理步骤的概要。首先,显示对象坐标计算部117的网络框格配置功能模块1172在框格模型上利用储存在联机网络结构信息保持部116中的网络信息,按照规定规则执行网络框格配置处理(步骤S111)。The outline of the display object coordinate calculation processing procedure will be described with reference to FIG. 14-1 . First, the network grid
接着,PLC框格配置功能模块1173在框格模型上利用储存在联机网络结构信息保持部116中的基板信息,按照规定规则执行对PLC框格和配线框格进行配置的PLC框格配置处理(步骤S112)。在该PLC框格配置处理中,针对在步骤S111中配置好的网络框格而配置PLC框格和配线框格。这些步骤S111的网络框格配置处理和步骤S112的PLC框格配置处理的结果储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中。Next, the PLC grid
其后,框格尺寸计算功能模块1174基于基板信息和用于配置框格的规定的规则,计算各个框格的尺寸,将其结果储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中(步骤S113)。另外,框格坐标计算功能模块1175基于储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中的框格尺寸,计算用于在显示部112上显示框格的坐标(步骤S114),显示对象坐标计算处理完成。Thereafter, the sash size
下面,针对图14-1所示的各个步骤中的处理的详细内容进行说明。图14-2是表示网络框格配置处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。首先,显示对象坐标计算部117的网络框格配置功能模块1172参照联机网络结构信息保持部116的网络数据,提取网络(步骤S131)。Next, details of processing in each step shown in FIG. 14-1 will be described. FIG. 14-2 is a flow chart showing an example of a network grid arrangement processing procedure. First, the network grid
接着,对提取出的网络从上方开始以网络序号顺次进行排序(步骤S132),将不带有网络序号的现场网络排序至下位(步骤S133)。然后,按照排序完成的顺序配置网络框格(步骤S134),将其结果储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中,网络框格配置处理完成。Next, the extracted networks are sorted from the top according to the network serial numbers (step S132 ), and the on-site networks without network serial numbers are sorted to the lower order (step S133 ). Then, configure the network grids according to the order of sorting (step S134 ), store the result in the grid model
图14-3是表示PLC框格配置处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。PLC框格配置功能模块1173从联机网络结构信息保持部116的基板信息中提取PLC(步骤S151)。接着,从提取到的PLC中选择在步骤S111的网络框格配置处理中配置在最下位的网络(步骤S152)。然后,选择与所选择的网络进行连接的PLC(步骤S153),从其中选择站点序号最小的PLC(步骤S154)。然后,从在步骤S152中选择的网络框格的左下侧的框格开始,顺次连续地配置所选择的PLC框格和配线框格(步骤S155)。此时,在PLC框格和网络框格之间配置配线框格。另外,在PLC框格不仅与在步骤S152中选择的网络,还与其它网络连接的情况下,向上方配置配线框格直至到达该网络为止。FIG. 14-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the PLC grid arrangement process. The PLC grid
其后,对与在步骤S152中选择的网络连接的PLC中是否存在其它PLC进行判定(步骤S156)。在存在其它PLC的情况(步骤S156中为是的情况)下,选择站点序号次小的PLC(步骤S157),返回步骤S155,在与在步骤S152中选择的网络连接的PLC全部被配置之前,重复进行相同的处理。Thereafter, it is determined whether there is another PLC among the PLCs connected to the network selected in step S152 (step S156 ). When there are other PLCs (yes in step S156), select the PLC with the second smallest station number (step S157), return to step S155, before all the PLCs connected to the network selected in step S152 are configured, Repeat the same treatment.
另外,在步骤S156中不存在其它PLC的情况(在步骤S156中为否的情况)下,对是否存在其它网络进行判定(步骤S158)。在存在其它网络的情况(在步骤S158中为是的情况)下,选择通过步骤S111的网络框格配置处理而配置在次下位的网络(步骤S159),返回步骤S153,在对配置在最上位的网络进行了PLC框格和配线框格的配置之前,重复执行上述处理。另外,在不存在其它网络的情况(在步骤S158中为否的情况)下,将PLC框格和配线框格的配置结果储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中(步骤S160),PLC框格配置处理完成。In addition, when there is no other PLC in step S156 (in the case of NO in step S156), it is determined whether or not there is another network (step S158). If there are other networks (YES in step S158), select the next lower network in the network grid layout process in step S111 (step S159), return to step S153, and place the highest Repeat the above process until the PLC grid and the wiring grid are configured in the network. In addition, when there is no other network (No in step S158), the configuration results of the PLC grid and the wiring grid are stored in the grid model holding function module 1171 (step S160), and the PLC grid The grid configuration process is complete.
图14-4是表示框格尺寸计算处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。首先,框格尺寸计算功能模块1174从储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中的框格模型中,选择1个PLC框格(步骤S171)。接着,针对与所选择的PLC框格相对应的PLC,从联机网络结构信息保持部116中读取基板信息,计算对包括增设基板信息在内的PLC框格进行显示所需的纵向尺寸和横向尺寸(步骤S172)。在这里,将安装在基板上的具有最小尺寸的1个单元作为基准单元并以矩形表示,将安装在基板上的单元及增设基板以该基准单元的倍数进行计算。例如,如果将基准单元的上下方向(以下称为纵向)的尺寸设为10,左右方向(以下称为横向)的尺寸设为10,则在基板上安装有3个单元的情况下,纵向尺寸为10,横向尺寸成为30。另外,在安装有增设基板的情况下,由于叠放于纵向上而进行描绘,所以纵向尺寸延伸为20。FIG. 14-4 is a flowchart showing an example of a cell size calculation processing procedure. First, the cell size
其后,框格尺寸计算功能模块1174对于储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中的框格模型中,是否存在其它PLC框格进行判定(步骤S173)。在存在其它PLC框格的情况(在步骤S173中为是的情况)下,返回步骤S171,重复执行上述处理,直至不存在尚未被选择的PLC框格。Thereafter, the sash size
另外,在不存在其它PLC框格的情况(在步骤S173中为否的情况)下,框格尺寸计算功能模块1174选择1个储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中的配线框格(步骤S174)。对所选择的配线框格计算纵向尺寸和横向尺寸(步骤S175)。在这里,使配线框格的纵向尺寸成为预先设定的规定值,使横向尺寸与配置在该配线框格下部的PLC框格的横向尺寸一致。In addition, when there is no other PLC grid (No in step S173), the grid size
其后,框格尺寸计算功能模块1174对于储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中的框格模型中,否存在其它配线框格进行判定(步骤S176)。在存在其它配线框格的情况(在步骤S176中为是的情况)下,返回步骤S174,重复执行上述处理,直至不存在尚未被选择的配线框格。Thereafter, the cell size
另外,在不存在其它配线框格的情况(在步骤S176中为否的情况)下,框格尺寸计算功能模块1174选择1个储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中的网络框格(步骤S177)。对所选择的网络框格计算纵向尺寸和横向尺寸(步骤S178)。在这里,使网络框格的纵向尺寸成为预先设定的规定值,使横向尺寸成为包含配置在其下部的配线框格的尺寸。In addition, when there is no other wiring grid (No in step S176), the grid size
其后,框格尺寸计算功能模块1174对于储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中的框格模型中,否存在其它网络单元进行判定(步骤S179)。在存在其它网络框格的情况(在步骤S179中为是的情况)下,返回步骤S177,重复执行上述处理,直至不存在尚未被选择的网络框格。Thereafter, the grid size
另外,在不存在其它网络框格的情况(在步骤S179中为否的情况)下,框格尺寸计算功能模块1174将包含通过上述计算出的框格尺寸在内的框格模型储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中(步骤S180),框格尺寸计算处理完成。In addition, when there are no other network cells (No in step S179), the cell size
图14-5是表示框格坐标计算处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。框格坐标计算功能模块1175读取储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中的带有框格尺寸的框格模型(步骤S191),从框格模型的左上侧开始顺次加上框格尺寸而计算框格坐标(步骤S192)。由此,框格坐标计算处理完成。FIG. 14-5 is a flowchart showing an example of a grid coordinate calculation processing procedure. The sash coordinate
(2)处理的具体例子(2) Specific examples of processing
由于在上述的说明中,对显示对象坐标计算处理的概要进行了记述,所以例举具有图1的结构的控制系统的情况,对该处理的具体例子如下进行说明。此外,在这里,利用图10的连接通路信息和图11的网络结构信息,进行显示对象的坐标计算处理。In the above description, the outline of the display object coordinate calculation processing has been described, so a specific example of the processing will be described below by taking the case of the control system having the configuration of FIG. 1 as an example. In addition, here, coordinate calculation processing of a display object is performed using the connection path information in FIG. 10 and the network configuration information in FIG. 11 .
(2-1)网络框格配置处理(2-1) Network frame configuration processing
首先,参照数据类别为“网络”的网络数据M1、M2、C、E3,从储存在联机网络结构信息保持部116中的图11的网络结构信息中提取控制器间网络No.1、控制器间网络No.2、现场网络、以及信息系统网络No.3。First, refer to the network data M1, M2, C, and E3 whose data type is "network", and extract the inter-controller network No. 1, controller Inter-network No.2, field network, and information system network No.3.
然后,将提取到的网络按照网络序号顺序进行排序。在该情况下,从配置在上方的网络开始,顺次成为“控制器间网络No.1(22A)→控制器间网络No.2(22B)→信息系统网络No.3(21)→现场网络(23)(括号内的数字是图1中的标号)”。然后,按照排序完成后的顺序配置网络框格。图15是表示网络框格配置处理的结果的图。在该图的状态下,成为仅确定了上下的配置关系,未确定左右配置关系的状态。Then, the extracted networks are sorted according to the sequence number of the networks. In this case, starting from the network arranged at the top, it becomes "inter-controller network No. 1 (22A) → inter-controller network No. 2 (22B) → information system network No. 3 (21) → site Network (23) (numbers in brackets are labels in Figure 1)". Then, configure the network panes in the order in which the sorting is done. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the result of network grid arrangement processing. In the state shown in the figure, only the vertical arrangement relationship is determined, and the left-right arrangement relationship is not determined.
(2-2)PLC框格配置处理(2-2) PLC frame configuration processing
图16-1~图16-5是表示PLC框格配置处理的步骤的一个例子的图。下面,参照这些图16-1~图16-5而对PLC框格的配置处理进行说明。FIGS. 16-1 to 16-5 are diagrams showing an example of the procedure of the PLC grid arrangement process. Next, the placement process of the PLC grid will be described with reference to these FIGS. 16-1 to 16-5 .
首先,显示对象坐标计算部117的PLC框格配置功能模块1173从图11的联机网络结构信息保持部116中,提取数据类别为“PLC网络”的连接网络信息P3n、P1n、P4n、P2n、P5n。First, the PLC grid
接着,从提取的连接网络信息中,取得与在图15中配置在最下位的网络即现场网络连接的PLC。在这里,取得PLC 10-4(连接网络信息P4n)和PLC 10-5(连接网络信息P5n)。在这些PLC 10-4(主站点)和PLC 10-5(本地站点1)中,从站点序号较小的PLC开始进行处理,但在这里,由于是现场网络,所以最先处理主站点,然后按照本地站点的站点序号顺序进行处理。由此,从PLC 10-4开始进行处理。Next, from the extracted connection network information, the PLC connected to the field network which is the lowest network arranged in FIG. 15 is acquired. Here, PLC 10-4 (network connection information P4n) and PLC 10-5 (network connection information P5n) are obtained. Among these PLC 10-4 (main station) and PLC 10-5 (local station 1), processing starts from the PLC with a smaller station number, but here, since it is an on-site network, the main station is processed first, and then Process according to the order of the site sequence number of the local site. Thus, processing starts from PLC 10-4.
将PLC 10-4框格和配线框格在图15的现场网络框格的左下方连续配置。此外,如图11的连接网络信息P4n所示,由于PLC 10-4也与控制器间网络No.1连接,所以从PLC 10-4框格开始至控制器间网络No.1框格也配置配线框格a。此时,使PLC 10-4框格、各网络框格和各配线框格a的宽度一致。其结果在图16-1中示出。The PLC 10-4 grid and the wiring grid are continuously arranged at the lower left of the field network grid in Fig. 15 . In addition, as shown in the connection network information P4n in Fig. 11, since PLC 10-4 is also connected to inter-controller network No. Wiring frame a. At this time, make the PLC 10-4 grid, each network grid and each wiring grid a have the same width. The result is shown in Figure 16-1.
接着,进行作为本地站点的PLC 10-5的处理。将PLC 10-5框格和配线框格b在图16-1的现场网络框格的左下方连续配置。此外,如图11的连接网络信息P5n所示,由于PLC 10-5也与控制器间网络No.2连接,所以从PLC 10-5框格至控制器间网络No.2框格也配置配线框格b。此时,位于现场网络的更上位的网络框格的横向宽度延伸,以将PLC 10-4框格和PLC 10-5框格包含在内。其结果在图16-2中示出。由于与现场网络连接的PLC至此为止,所以在现场网络中的PLC框格和配线框格的配置处理完成。Next, processing of the PLC 10-5 as the local station is performed. Arrange PLC 10-5 grid and wiring grid b consecutively at the lower left of the field network grid in Figure 16-1. In addition, as shown in the connection network information P5n in Fig. 11, since PLC 10-5 is also connected to inter-controller network No. Wireframe b. At this time, the horizontal width of the upper network grid located in the field network is extended so as to include the PLC 10-4 grid and the PLC 10-5 grid. The result is shown in Figure 16-2. Since the PLCs connected to the field network have come to this point, the configuration process of the PLC grid and the wiring grid in the field network is completed.
接着,作为配置在现场网络的上位的网络而选择信息系统网络No.3,取得与该信息系统网络No.3连接的PLC(PLC 10-1、10-2)。在这里,针对尚未进行配置的PLC 10-1(连接网络信息P1n、站点序号1)和PLC 10-2(连接网络信息P2n、站点序号2),进行PLC框格的配置处理。在这里,以站点序号从小到大的顺序、即PLC 10-1→PLC 10-2的顺序进行处理。Next, the information system network No. 3 is selected as the upper network arranged on the field network, and the PLC (PLC 10-1, 10-2) connected to the information system network No. 3 is acquired. Here, for the PLC 10-1 (connection network information P1n, station number 1) and PLC 10-2 (connection network information P2n, station number 2) that have not yet been configured, the configuration process of the PLC grid is performed. Here, processing is performed in ascending order of station numbers, that is, in the order of PLC 10-1→PLC 10-2.
首先,将PLC 10-1框格和配线框格c在图16-2的信息系统网络No.3框格的左下方连续配置。由于此时已经在信息系统网络No.3的下部配置有PLC 10-4和PLC 10-5的配置框格a、b,所以在PLC 10-5右侧的位置上配置PLC 10-1框格和配线框格c。First, the PLC 10-1 grid and the wiring grid c are continuously arranged at the lower left of the information system network No. 3 grid in Fig. 16-2. Since the configuration frames a and b of PLC 10-4 and PLC 10-5 have been configured at the lower part of the information system network No.3, the PLC 10-1 frame is configured on the right side of PLC 10-5 and wiring grid c.
在这里,设定下述条件,即,配置时优先使配置在更下位的网络中是按站点序号顺序进行配置的,不进行将配置在更下位的PLC框格的配置关系分割开的配置。此时,由于同时还进行向配置在更上位的网络的配线,所以在该网络中,随着已经配置的状况的不同,有可能并没有按站点序号顺序进行配置。Here, the condition is set that the arrangement is prioritized in the order of the station numbers in the lower network, and the arrangement relationship of the lower PLC grid is not divided. At this time, since the wiring to the higher-level network is also performed at the same time, the network may not be arranged in the order of station numbers depending on the status of the already-placed network.
另外,如图11的连接网络信息P1n所示,由于PLC 10-1也与控制器间网络No.2、No.1连接,所以从PLC 10-1框格至控制器间网络No.2框格及控制器间网络No.1框格配置配线框格c。其结果在图16-3中示出。In addition, as shown in the connection network information P1n in Fig. 11, since PLC 10-1 is also connected to inter-controller networks No. Grid and controller inter-network No.1 grid configuration wiring grid c. The results are shown in Figure 16-3.
接着进行站点序号次小的PLC 10-2框格的配置处理。将PLC10-2框格和配线框格d在图16-3的信息系统网络No.3框格的左下侧连续配置。此时,已经在信息系统网络No.3中配置有PLC 10-4框格、PLC 10-5框格及PLC 10-1框格的配线框格a、b、c。由此,在上述限制下,在PLC 10-1的右侧配置PLC 10-2框格和配线框格d。此外,如图11的连接网络信息P2n所示,由于PLC 10-2也与控制器间网络No.2连接,所以从PLC 10-2框格至控制器间框格No.2框格配置配线框格d。其结果在图16-4中示出。由于与信息系统网络No.3连接的PLC至此为止,所以信息系统网络No.3中的PLC框格和配线框格的配置处理完成。Next, the configuration processing of the PLC 10-2 grid with the second smallest serial number is carried out. The PLC10-2 grid and the wiring grid d are continuously arranged on the lower left side of the information system network No. 3 grid in FIG. 16-3. At this time, wiring grids a, b, and c of PLC 10-4 grid, PLC 10-5 grid, and PLC 10-1 grid are already arranged in information system network No. 3. Therefore, under the above restrictions, the PLC 10-2 grid and the wiring grid d are arranged on the right side of the PLC 10-1. In addition, as shown in the connection network information P2n in Fig. 11, since PLC 10-2 is also connected to inter-controller network No. wireframe d. The result is shown in Figure 16-4. Since the PLC connected to the information system network No. 3 ends here, the arrangement process of the PLC grid and the wiring grid in the information system network No. 3 is completed.
接着,作为配置在信息系统网络No.3的上位的网络而选择控制器间网络No.2,但在与该控制器间网络No.2连接的PLC(PLC 10-2、10-1、10-5)中,没有尚未配置的PLC。由此,继续选择配置在其上位的控制器间网络No.1。在与该控制器间网络No.1连接的PLC(PLC 10-3、10-1、10-4)中,尚未配置的PLC为PLC 10-3(连接网络信息P3n)。由此,针对该PLC 10-3进行PLC框格和配置框格e的配置处理。在控制器间网络的情况下,通常可以与管理站点、普通站点无关地,以站点序号顺次(从站点序号较小的PLC开始顺次)进行处理。但是,在该例子中,由于与控制器间网络No.1连接且尚未配置的处理对象即PLC只有1个,所以在这里仅进行PLC10-3的配置处理。Next, select the inter-controller network No. 2 as the upper network arranged on the information system network No. 3, but the PLC (PLC 10-2, 10-1, 10 -5), there is no unconfigured PLC. In this way, the inter-controller network No. 1 arranged at the upper level is continuously selected. Among the PLCs (PLC 10-3, 10-1, and 10-4) connected to the inter-controller network No. 1, the unconfigured PLC is PLC 10-3 (connection network information P3n). As a result, configuration processing of the PLC pane and the configuration pane e is performed for the PLC 10-3. In the case of a controller-to-controller network, it is usually possible to process in order of station numbers (in order from the PLC with the smaller station number) irrespective of the management station and normal stations. However, in this example, since there is only one PLC which is the processing target which is connected to the inter-controller network No. 1 and has not yet been configured, only the configuration processing of PLC 10 - 3 is performed here.
将PLC 10-3框格和配线框格e在图16-4的控制器间网络No.1框格的左下方连续配置。此时,已经在控制器间网络No.1中配置有PLC 10-4、10-1的配线框格a、c,但由于其间的框格空余,所以在左下方连续配置后,成为在该空余的框格中配置PLC 10-3框格和配线框格e的情况。其结果在图16-5中示出。Arrange the PLC 10-3 grid and the wiring grid e continuously on the lower left of the No.1 grid of the inter-controller network in Figure 16-4. At this time, the wiring grids a and c of PLC 10-4 and 10-1 have already been placed in the inter-controller network No. The case where the PLC 10-3 grid and the wiring grid e are placed in the spare grid. The results are shown in Figure 16-5.
由于与控制器间网络No.1连接的PLC至此为止,所以在控制器间网络No.1中的PLC框格和配线框格的配置处理完成。另外,由于控制器间网络No.1是最上位的网络,所以以上PLC框格的配置处理完成。Since the PLC connected to the inter-controller network No. 1 ends here, the arrangement process of the PLC grid and the wiring grid in the inter-controller network No. 1 is completed. In addition, since the inter-controller network No. 1 is the highest network, the arrangement process of the above PLC grid is completed.
(2-3)框格尺寸计算处理(2-3) Sash size calculation processing
显示对象坐标计算部117的框格尺寸计算功能模块1174针对图16-5的框格配置结果计算各个框格的尺寸。特别地,针对PLC框格,利用联机网络结构信息保持部116的基板信息,计算显示PLC所需的尺寸。The grid size
首先,框格尺寸计算功能模块1174进行PLC框格的尺寸计算。对于该PLC框格的计算,并不限定从哪个PLC开始进行处理的顺序。在该例子中,以PLC 10-1~PLC 10-5的顺序进行各个PLC框格的尺寸计算。First, the grid size
框格尺寸计算功能模块1174参照图11的联机网络结构信息保持部116的PLC 10-1的基板信息P1b,提取出没有增设基板这一信息,将框格的纵向尺寸计算为30。同时,从基板信息P1b中提取出基板的槽数为“4”这一信息,将框格的横向尺寸计算为40。The grid size
针对PLC 10-2也相同地,从基板信息P2b中提取出没有增设基板这一信息,将框格的纵向尺寸计算为30。另外,从基板信息P2b中提取出基板的槽数为“3”这一信息,将框格的横向尺寸计算为30。Similarly for PLC 10-2, the information that no board is added is extracted from the board information P2b, and the vertical dimension of the sash is calculated as 30. In addition, the information that the number of grooves of the substrate is "3" is extracted from the substrate information P2b, and the horizontal size of the grid is calculated as 30.
针对PLC 10-3,从基板信息P3b中提取出具有增设基板这一信息,将框格的纵向尺寸计算为60。同时,从基板信息P3b中提取出基板的槽数为“3”、增设基板的槽数为“2”这一信息,将框格的横向尺寸与尺寸较大的基板匹配而计算为30。For PLC 10-3, the information that there is an additional board is extracted from the board information P3b, and the vertical dimension of the sash is calculated as 60. At the same time, the information that the number of slots of the board is "3" and the number of slots of the additional board is "2" is extracted from the board information P3b, and the horizontal size of the grid is matched with the larger board to calculate as 30.
针对PLC 10-4,从基板信息P4b中提取出没有增设基板这一信息,将框格的纵向尺寸计算为30。此外,从基板信息P4b中提取出基板的槽数为“4”这一信息,将框格的横向尺寸计算为40。For PLC 10-4, the information that no board is added is extracted from the board information P4b, and the vertical dimension of the grid is calculated as 30. In addition, the information that the number of grooves of the board is "4" is extracted from the board information P4b, and the lateral size of the grid is calculated as 40.
针对PLC 10-5也相同地,从基板信息P5b中提取出没有增设基板这一信息,将框格的纵向尺寸计算为30。同时,从基板信息P5b中提取出基板的槽数为“4”这一信息,将框格的横向尺寸计算为40。Similarly for PLC 10-5, the information that no board is added is extracted from the board information P5b, and the vertical dimension of the sash is calculated as 30. At the same time, the information that the number of grooves of the substrate is "4" is extracted from the substrate information P5b, and the horizontal size of the grid is calculated as 40.
其后,提取在纵向(配线方向)上并列的PLC框格(在配置关系上,共同享有相同横向尺寸的PLC框格),将该PLC框格的横向尺寸统一为较大的PLC框格的横向尺寸。在这里,由于横向尺寸为30的PLC 10-3框格和横向尺寸为40的PLC 10-5框格在纵向(配线方向)上并列,所以将PLC 10-3框格的横向尺寸变更为PLC 10-5框格的横向尺寸即40,以使得共同享有相同的横向尺寸。Afterwards, the PLC sash paralleled in the vertical direction (wiring direction) (PLC sash sharing the same horizontal size in terms of configuration relationship) is extracted, and the horizontal size of the PLC sash is unified into a larger PLC sash the horizontal size of the . Here, since the PLC 10-3 sash with a horizontal dimension of 30 and the PLC 10-5 sash with a horizontal dimension of 40 are juxtaposed in the vertical direction (wiring direction), change the horizontal dimension of the PLC 10-3 sash to The horizontal dimension of the PLC 10-5 sash is 40, so that they share the same horizontal dimension.
接着,框格尺寸计算功能模块1174进行配线框格的尺寸计算。此时,对于配线框格,纵向尺寸设为固定值10,但横向尺寸反映了配置在各个配线框格的下部的PLC框格的横向尺寸。另外,在配线框格的横向上配置PLC框格和配线框格的情况下,使配线框格在纵向上以该PLC框格和配线框格的纵向尺寸的合计尺寸相应的量进行延伸。Next, the grid size
另外,框格尺寸计算功能模块1174进行网络框格的尺寸计算。对于该网络框格的尺寸计算,并不限定从哪个网络开始进行处理的顺序。在该例子中,以从配置在上位的网络框格开始顺次进行尺寸计算。In addition, the cell size
首先,对于控制器间网络No.1,将纵向尺寸设为固定值10,对于横向尺寸,由于在其下方配置有分别连接至PLC 10-4、10-3、10-1的配线框格a、e、c,所以形成包含它们在内的尺寸。即,由于PLC 10-4框格、PLC 10-3框格及PLC 10-1框格的横向尺寸分别为40、40、40,所以控制器间网络No.1框格的横向尺寸成为120(=40+40+40)。First, for inter-controller network No. 1, set the vertical dimension to a fixed value of 10, and for the horizontal dimension, there are wiring grids connected to PLCs 10-4, 10-3, and 10-1 below it. a, e, c, so form dimensions including them. That is, since the horizontal dimensions of the PLC 10-4 grid, PLC 10-3 grid, and PLC 10-1 grid are 40, 40, and 40 respectively, the horizontal size of the No. 1 grid in the inter-controller network is 120 ( =40+40+40).
另外,对于控制器间网络No.2也相同地,将纵向尺寸设为固定值10,对于横向尺寸,由于在其下方配置有分别连接至PLC 10-5、10-1、10-2的配线框格b、c、d,所以形成包含它们在内的尺寸。即,由于PLC 10-5框格、PLC 10-1框格及PLC 10-2框格的横向尺寸分别为40、40、30,所以控制器间网络No.2框格的横向尺寸成为110(=40+40+30)。In addition, for inter-controller network No. 2, the vertical dimension is set to a fixed value of 10 in the same way. As for the horizontal dimension, since the devices connected to PLCs 10-5, 10-1, and 10-2 are placed below it, Wireframe grids b, c, d, so form dimensions that include them. That is, since the horizontal dimensions of the PLC 10-5 grid, PLC 10-1 grid, and PLC 10-2 grid are 40, 40, and 30 respectively, the horizontal size of the No. 2 grid in the inter-controller network is 110 ( =40+40+30).
并且,对于信息系统网络No.3也相同地,将纵向尺寸设为固定值10,对于横向尺寸,由于在其下方配置有分别连接至10-1、10-2的配线框格c、d,所以形成包含它们在内的尺寸。即,由于PLC10-1框格及PLC 10-2框格的横向尺寸分别为40、30,所以信息系统网络No.3框格的横向尺寸成为70(=40+30)。Also, for information system network No. 3, the vertical dimension is set to a fixed value of 10, and since the horizontal dimension is arranged below it, wiring grids c and d respectively connected to 10-1 and 10-2 , so form dimensions that include them. That is, since the horizontal dimensions of the grid of PLC 10-1 and the grid of PLC 10-2 are 40 and 30, respectively, the horizontal dimension of the grid of information system network No. 3 is 70 (=40+30).
另外,对于现场网络也相同地,将纵向尺寸设为固定值10,对于横向尺寸,由于在其下方配置有分别连接至10-4、10-5的配线框格a、b,所以形成包含它们在内的尺寸。即,由于PLC 10-4框格及PLC 10-5框格的横向尺寸分别为40、40,所以现场网络框格的横向尺寸成为80(=40+40)。In addition, for the field network, the vertical dimension is set to a fixed value of 10 in the same way, and the horizontal dimension is arranged below the wiring grids a and b respectively connected to 10-4 and 10-5, so the formation includes their included dimensions. That is, since the horizontal dimensions of the PLC 10-4 grid and the PLC 10-5 grid are 40 and 40, respectively, the horizontal dimension of the field network grid is 80 (=40+40).
图17是表示框格尺寸计算结果的一个例子的图。该图17是将上述结果写入图16-5的框格配置结果中而成的。将其结果储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中。以上框格尺寸计算处理完成。FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of the calculation result of the cell size. This FIG. 17 is obtained by writing the above-mentioned results into the result of grid arrangement in FIG. 16-5. The result is stored in the grid model holding
(2-4)框格坐标计算处理(2-4) Grid coordinate calculation processing
显示对象坐标计算部117的对象坐标计算功能模块1175进行下述处理,即,读出储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中的包括框格尺寸计算结果的框格模型,以从框格模型的左上开始顺次加上框格尺寸而对框格坐标进行计算。The object coordinate
具体地说,框格坐标计算功能模块1175将读出的图17的框格模型的左上角的坐标设为(0,0),对于该坐标位置逐个加上各个框格的尺寸,而计算各个框格的坐标。图18是表示框格坐标计算结果的一个例子的图。该图18是将图17的框格模型中的左上角的坐标设为(0,0),加上各个框格尺寸而得到的。此外,在该图中,从原点开始将右方作为x轴的正方向,从原点开始将下方作为y轴的正方向。Specifically, the grid coordinate
(系统结构显示处理)(system structure display processing)
图19是表示系统结构显示处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。首先,系统结构显示部118从具有由显示对象坐标计算部117计算出的框格坐标的框格模型中提取网络框格,基于其坐标位置显示各个网络(步骤S211)。在这里,使显示部112上的显示系统结构的区域的规定位置与框格模型的原点(0,0)对应,从该点开始,基于框格模型的框格坐标描绘网络。网络是由线进行描绘的。另外,针对各个网络显示其名称。FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of a system configuration display processing procedure. First, the system
接着,从框格模型中提取PLC框格,基于其坐标位置显示各个PLC框格(步骤S212)。对于该PLC框格,是基于框格模型中所包含的坐标信息(或者尺寸信息)配置矩形形状的对象而形成的。另外,此时基于各个PLC的基板信息,将安装在基板的各个槽中的单元分割开并进行显示,并且进行在该分割区域内显示该单元名称的处理。Next, the PLC grid is extracted from the grid model, and each PLC grid is displayed based on its coordinate position (step S212 ). The PLC grid is formed by arranging rectangular-shaped objects based on coordinate information (or size information) included in the grid model. In addition, at this time, based on the board information of each PLC, the units mounted in the respective slots of the board are divided and displayed, and the name of the unit is displayed in the divided area.
其后,显示将各PLC和网络进行连接的线即配线(步骤S213)。该处理基于联机网络结构信息保持部116中的基板信息,通过将各个PLC的通信单元和与该通信单元连接的网络之间使用线进行连结而进行。由此,系统结构显示处理完成。另外,将由该系统结构显示部118生成的系统结构信息显示在显示部112上。Then, the wiring which is the line which connects each PLC and a network is displayed (step S213). This processing is performed by connecting the communication unit of each PLC and the network connected to the communication unit using lines based on the board information in the on-line network configuration
图20是表示通过系统结构显示处理而在显示部上显示的系统结构信息的一个例子的图。在该图20的例子中,通过在各个PLC的通信单元上以字符串显示网络类别的头部文字和网络序号、该网络中的站点序号、以及是管理站点(主站点)还是普通站点(本地站点),使网络参数的确认变得容易。FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of system configuration information displayed on a display unit by system configuration display processing. In the example in Figure 20, the header text and network number of the network category, the station number in the network, and whether it is a management station (master station) or a normal station (local station) are displayed on the communication units of each PLC in character strings site), making it easy to confirm network parameters.
另外,在读出各个PLC所保持的项目信息时,如果读出其状态(动作状况或诊断信息),则可以将它们与图20的系统结构显示叠加地进行显示。In addition, when reading out the item information held by each PLC, if the status (operating status or diagnostic information) is read out, they can be superimposed and displayed on the system configuration display in FIG. 20 .
根据该实施方式1,由于利用从实际的构成控制系统的各个PLC收集到的网络结构信息,自动地将可解析的范围内的网络的连接关系及PLC的配置关系以图形显示,所以具有可以使生成网络的系统结构图的画面的工时减少这样的效果。另外,具有易于对构成生产设备等的控制系统的网络及PLC的系统结构整体进行把握这样的效果。并且,由于形成为从PLC必须向上方配置配线,所以具有下述效果,即,可以容易地判别PLC以何种程度从属于哪些网络,对构成控制系统的网络及PLC的系统结构整体的把握、以及对状态的把握都变得容易。According to the first embodiment, since the network configuration information collected from the actual PLCs constituting the control system is used to automatically display the connection relationship of the network and the arrangement relationship of the PLC within the analyzable range, it is possible to use The man-hours required to create the screen of the system configuration diagram of the network are reduced. In addition, there is an effect that it is easy to grasp the overall system configuration of the network and PLC constituting the control system of the production equipment and the like. In addition, since the wiring must be arranged upward from the PLC, it is possible to easily determine to what extent the PLC belongs to which network, and to grasp the overall system structure of the network constituting the control system and the PLC. , And the grasp of the status has become easier.
此外,在上述说明中,形成为将由个人计算机等构成的控制系统设计装置100与控制系统的PLC 10连接的形态,但是也可以将控制系统设计装置100的功能模块搭载在与可编程控制器连接,对控制系统的动作状态及控制系统进行设定的显示器上。通过这样构成,可以将构成控制系统的网络及PLC的系统结构整体显示在显示器的画面上。In addition, in the above description, the control
图21是表示具有控制系统设计装置的功能的显示器的硬件结构的框图。该显示器150构成为,在显示器150上的总线157连接有:显示部151,其用于显示规定的画面;由触摸键等构成的输入部152;通信端口153,其用于与PLC10进行通信;储存部154,其由硬盘装置等构成,对通过该显示器150设定的数据(即显示画面程序)进行存储;微处理器155,其用于进行在显示部151上进行显示的处理(即,执行显示画面程序而显示规定画面的处理,及系统结构的设定及管理的处理);以及数据储存存储器156,其用于储存伴随该处理产生的临时数据。此外,在输入部152为触摸面板画面的情况下,使输入部152和显示部151成为一体。FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a hardware configuration of a display having the function of a control system design device. The
由此,无需另行准备使控制系统设计装置100进行动作的信息处理终端而与PLC10连接,在构成控制系统的显示器150上可以容易地把握系统整体的结构及状态。Thereby, without separately preparing an information processing terminal for operating the control
实施方式2
在实施方式1中,将网络框格以赋予网络的序号顺次配置,将PLC框格以所选择的网络内的站点序号较小框格开始顺次配置,但在本实施方式2中,针对下述控制系统设计装置及控制系统设计方法进行说明,即,并非按照单纯的序号顺序,可以自动计算能够容易地把握构成控制系统的网络及PLC的系统结构整体的配置,并进行显示。In
图22-1是示意地表示本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置的网络框格配置功能模块的功能结构的框图,图22-2是相同地示意表示PLC框格配置功能模块的功能结构的框图。Fig. 22-1 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional structure of the network grid configuration functional module of the control system design device according to the present invention, and Fig. 22-2 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional structure of the PLC grid configuration functional module similarly .
如图22-1所示,网络框格配置功能模块1172具有:其它网络连接PLC提取单元11721,其提取与网络连接的PLC中,还与其它网络连接的PLC;以及网络类别排序单元11722,其将与现场网络关联程度更高的网络配置在下方,将与信息系统网络21关联程度更高的网络配置在上方,以排序为容易把握控制系统的整体结构的最佳配置。As shown in Figure 22-1, the network grid
在这里,所谓与现场网络关联的程度是指,在属于该网络的PLC中,还从属于现场网络的PLC的数量(或者比例)越多,与现场网络关联的程度就越高。另外,所谓与信息系统网络关联的程度是指,在属于该网络的PLC中,还从属于信息系统网络的PLC的数量(或者比例)越多,与信息系统网络关联的程度就越高。Here, the degree of association with the field network means that among the PLCs belonging to the network, the greater the number (or ratio) of PLCs also belonging to the field network, the higher the degree of association with the field network. In addition, the so-called degree of association with the information system network means that among the PLCs belonging to the network, the greater the number (or ratio) of PLCs also subordinate to the information system network, the higher the degree of association with the information system network.
另外,如图22-2所示,PLC框格配置功能模块1173具有:PLC框格配置候补提取单元11731,其提取不会将已配置于与所选择的网络相比位于下位的网络中的PLC的配置关系割裂开的配置候补;以及PLC框格配置候补选择单元11732,其从候补中选择最近邻、最遵循站点序号顺序的最佳配置。此外,由于其它的结构要素与实施方式1相同,所以省略其说明。In addition, as shown in FIG. 22-2 , the PLC grid
接着,针对本实施方式2的处理步骤进行说明。在本实施方式2的控制系统设计处理中,直至将通过联机网络结构信息收集部114收集到的网络结构信息的数据(PLC数据)储存在联机网络结构信息保持部116中为止,与实施方式1相同。但是,在实施方式2中,对于该网络结构信息的数据,显示对象坐标计算部117与实施方式1的不同点在于,进行网络框格配置处理的图14-2的处理和进行PLC框格配置处理的图14-3的处理。由此,以下对网络框格配置处理和PLC框格配置处理进行说明,由于针对其它的处理的说明相同,所以进行省略。Next, the processing procedure of
(1)处理的概要(1) Outline of processing
(1-1)网络框格配置处理(1-1) Network frame configuration processing
在该实施方式2中,其目的在于尽量减少所生成(显示)的系统结构信息中的网络配线的交叉。由此,其特征在于,按照以下规则A~D的顺序,优先进行网络框格和PLC框格的配置。In the second embodiment, the purpose is to minimize the intersection of network wiring in the generated (displayed) system configuration information. Thus, it is characterized in that the arrangement of the network grid and the PLC grid is prioritized in accordance with the order of the following rules A to D.
A.在构成控制系统的网络及PLC的系统结构中,以太网(注册商标)这样的信息系统网络、控制器间网络、和现场网络的使用目的明确。即,信息系统网络位于系统的上位,控制器间网络位于系统的中位,现场网络位于系统的下位。由此,在本实施方式2中,按照如上所述的顺序配置网络。A. In the system structure of the network and PLC constituting the control system, the purpose of use of the information system network such as Ethernet (registered trademark), inter-controller network, and field network is clear. That is, the information system network is located at the upper level of the system, the inter-controller network is located at the middle level of the system, and the field network is located at the lower level of the system. Therefore, in
B.与同一个网络连接的PLC彼此近邻地配置。特别是在下位网络中,由于1个网络大多构成1个单元组,所以与同一个下位网络连接的PLC彼此近邻地配置。在这里,所谓单元组是指,例如将控制系统中的处理按功能进行分类时的PLC群。例如,在控制系统区分为涂装工序、曝光工序、清洗工序、…等各个工序的情况下,进行上述各个工序的处理的一组装置的汇总称为一个单元组。B. PLCs connected to the same network are placed adjacent to each other. Especially in the lower-level network, since one network often constitutes one unit group, PLCs connected to the same lower-level network are arranged adjacent to each other. Here, the unit group refers to, for example, a PLC group when the processing in the control system is classified by function. For example, when the control system is divided into each process such as a painting process, an exposure process, a cleaning process, .
C.由于与上位网络连接的PLC,大多具有单元组控制器的作用,所以不必彼此近邻地配置。C. Since most of the PLCs connected to the upper network function as unit group controllers, it is not necessary to arrange them adjacent to each other.
D.按照网络序号及站点序号的顺序进行配置。D. Configure according to the sequence of network serial number and site serial number.
图23-1是表示本实施方式2所涉及的网络框格配置处理步骤的一个列子的流程图。首先,网络框格配置功能模块1172参照联机网络结构信息保持部116的网络数据,提取网络(步骤S231)。然后,按照上述规则A,将提取到的网络从上方开始以信息系统网络、控制器间网络、现场网络的类别进行排序(步骤S232)。FIG. 23-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of network grid layout processing according to the second embodiment. First, the network grid
接着,从排序后的网络类别中选择1种网络类别(步骤S233)。并且,其它网络连接PLC提取单元11721提取与所选择的网络类别中的各个网络进行连接的PLC(步骤S234)。Next, one network category is selected from the sorted network categories (step S233 ). Then, the other network connection
其后,网络类别排序单元11722针对各个网络,对还与其它现场网络连接的PLC的数量进行计数,将与其它现场网络连接的PLC数量越多的网络越向下方配置(步骤S235)。Thereafter, the network
接着,网络类别排序单元11722针对各个网络,对还与其它信息系统网络连接的PLC的数量进行计数,将与其它信息系统网络连接的PLC数量越多的网络越向上方配置(步骤S236)。Next, the
最后,网络类别排序单元11722针对各个网络,对还与其它的控制器间网络连接的PLC的数量进行计数,将与其它控制器间网络连接的PLC数量越多的网络越向上方配置(步骤S237)。如上所述,执行1个网络类别中的各个网络之间的排序处理。Finally, the
其后,对是否存在没有被选择的其它网络类别进行判定(步骤S238)。在存在没有被选择的其它网络类别的情况(在步骤S238中为是的情况)下,返回步骤S233,重复执行上述处理,直至不存在没有被选择的其它网络类别。Thereafter, it is determined whether there are other network types that have not been selected (step S238 ). If there are other network categories that have not been selected (YES in step S238 ), return to step S233 and repeat the above processing until there are no other network categories that have not been selected.
另外,在不存在没有被选择的其它网络类别的情况(在步骤S238中为否的情况)下,网络框格配置功能模块1172按照排序结束后的顺序配置网络框格(步骤S239),将其结果储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中,网络框格配置处理完成。In addition, when there is no other network category that has not been selected (No in step S238), the network grid
(1-2)PLC框格配置处理(1-2) PLC frame configuration processing
图23-2~图23-3是表示本实施方式2所涉及的PLC框格配置处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。PLC框格配置功能模块1173从联机网络结构信息保持部116的基板信息中提取PLC(步骤S251)。接着,选择在图23-1的网络框格配置处理中配置在最下位的网络(步骤S252)。然后,选择与所选择的网络连接的PLC(步骤S253),从中选择站点序号最小的PLC(步骤S254)。FIGS. 23-2 to 23-3 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the PLC grid arrangement process according to the second embodiment. The PLC grid
PLC框格配置功能模块1173对是否已经配置了与选择的网络连接的PLC进行判定(步骤S255)。在没有配置与该网络连接的PLC的情况(在步骤S255中为否的情况)下,PLC框格配置候补选择单元11732针对所提取的PLC,从该网络的左下侧的框格开始顺次连续地配置配线框格和PLC框格(步骤S260)。The PLC grid
另外,在步骤S255中,在已经配置有与该网络连接的PLC的情况(在步骤S255中为是的情况)下,PLC框格配置候补提取单元11731判定是否可以提取出不会将已经配置在与该网络相比位于下位的网络中的PLC的配置关系分割开的配置候补(步骤S256)。In addition, in step S255, when the PLC connected to the network has already been placed (YES in step S255), the PLC grid placement candidate extraction unit 11731 determines whether it is possible to extract Placement candidates in which the arrangement relationship of the PLCs in the lower network than the network is divided (step S256 ).
在无法提取出不会将已经配置在与该网络相比位于下位的网络中的PLC的配置关系分割开的配置候补的情况(在步骤S256中为否的情况)下,PLC框格配置候补选择单元11732从该网络的左下侧的框格开始顺次连续地配置配线框格和PLC框格(步骤S260)。When it is not possible to extract a placement candidate that does not separate the placement relationship of PLCs already placed in a network that is lower than the network (in the case of No in step S256), PLC grid placement candidate selection The unit 11732 successively arranges the wiring grid and the PLC grid sequentially from the lower left grid of the network (step S260 ).
另外,在步骤S256中,在可以提取出不会将已经配置在与该网络相比位于下位的网络中的PLC的配置关系分割开的配置候补的情况(在步骤S256中为是的情况)下,PLC框格配置候补提取单元11731判定是否可以从该候补中提取与已经配置在该网络中的PLC最近邻地进行配置的配置候补(步骤S257)。In addition, in step S256, when it is possible to extract a placement candidate that does not separate the placement relationship of PLCs already placed in a network lower than the network (YES in step S256) Then, the PLC grid configuration candidate extracting unit 11731 judges whether or not it is possible to extract a configuration candidate configured as the nearest neighbor to a PLC already configured in the network from the candidates (step S257 ).
在无法提取与已经配置在该网络中的PLC最近邻地进行配置的配置候补的情况(在步骤S257中为否的情况)下,PLC框格配置候补选择单元11732从该网络的左下侧的框格开始顺次连续地配置配线框格和PLC框格(步骤S260)。In the case where it is not possible to extract a configuration candidate that is placed in the nearest neighbor to a PLC already deployed in the network (NO in step S257), the PLC grid configuration candidate selection unit 11732 selects from the frame on the lower left side of the network. The wiring grid and the PLC grid are sequentially and continuously arranged starting from the grid (step S260 ).
另外,在步骤S257中,在可以提取与已经配置在该网络中的PLC最近邻地进行配置的配置候补的情况(在步骤S257中为是的情况)下,PLC框格配置候补提取单元11731进行下述判定,即,是否可以从该配置候补中提取与已经配置在该网络中的PLC之间最遵循站点序号顺序的配置候补(步骤S258)。In addition, in step S257, when it is possible to extract a placement candidate placed in the nearest neighbor to a PLC already placed in the network (YES in step S257), the PLC grid placement candidate extraction unit 11731 performs It is judged whether or not the placement candidate that follows the order of the station numbers most closely among the PLCs already placed in the network can be extracted from the placement candidates (step S258 ).
在无法提取与已经配置在该网络中的PLC之间最遵循站点序号顺序的配置候补的情况(在步骤S258中为否的情况)下,PLC框格配置候补选择单元11732从该网络的左下侧的框格开始顺次连续地配置配线框格和PLC框格(步骤S260)。If it is impossible to extract the configuration candidate that follows the order of station numbers among the PLCs that have already been configured in the network (No in step S258), the PLC grid configuration candidate selection unit 11732 selects from the lower left side of the network. The wiring grids and the PLC grids are sequentially and continuously arranged from the grids (step S260 ).
另外,在步骤S258中,在可以提取与已经配置在该网络中的PLC之间最遵循站点序号顺序的配置候补的情况(在步骤S258中为是的情况)下,选择该配置候补,PLC框格配置候补选择单元11732按照该配置候补配置配线框格和PLC框格(步骤S259)。In addition, in step S258, in the case where it is possible to extract the configuration candidate that most follows the order of station numbers among the PLCs already configured in the network (YES in step S258), the configuration candidate is selected, and the PLC frame The grid layout candidate selection unit 11732 arranges the wiring grid and the PLC grid according to the layout candidate (step S259 ).
其后,在步骤S260之后,对与在步骤S252中选择的网络连接的PLC中,是否存在其它PLC这一情况进行判定(步骤S261)。在存在其它PLC的情况(在步骤S261中为是的情况)下,选择站点序号次小的PLC(步骤S262),返回步骤S255,重复进行相同处理,直至不存在其它与在步骤S252中选择的网络连接的PLC。Then, after step S260 , it is determined whether or not there is another PLC in the PLC connected to the network selected in step S252 (step S261 ). When there are other PLCs (in the case of yes in step S261), select the PLC with the second smallest station number (step S262), return to step S255, and repeat the same process until there are no other PLCs with the selected one in step S252. Network connected PLC.
另外,在步骤261中不存在其它PLC的情况(在步骤S261中为否的情况)下,对是否存在其它网络进行判定(步骤S263)。在存在其它网络的情况(在步骤S263中为是的情况)下,选择在网络框格配置处理中配置在次下位的网络(步骤S264),返回步骤S253,在对配置在最上位的网络配置了PLC框格和配线框格之前,重复执行上述处理。另外,在不存在其它网络的情况(在步骤S263中为否的情况)下,将PLC框格和配线框格的配置结果储存在框格模型保持功能模块1171中(步骤S265),PLC框格配置处理完成。In addition, when there is no other PLC in step 261 (in the case of NO in step S261 ), it is determined whether or not there is another network (step S263 ). If there are other networks (Yes in step S263), select the next lower network configured in the network grid configuration process (step S264), return to step S253, and configure Repeat the above process until the PLC grid and wiring grid are completed. In addition, when there is no other network (No in step S263), the configuration results of the PLC grid and the wiring grid are stored in the grid model holding function module 1171 (step S265), and the PLC grid The grid configuration process is complete.
(2)处理的具体例子(2) Specific examples of processing
由于在上述的说明中,对网络框格和PLC框格的配置处理的概要进行了记述,所以例举具有图1的结构的控制系统的情况,将该处理的具体例子如下进行说明。此外,在这里,利用图10的连接通路信息和图11的网络结构信息,进行框格的配置处理。In the above description, the outline of the arrangement process of the network pane and the PLC pane has been described, so a specific example of the process will be described below by taking the case of the control system having the configuration of FIG. 1 as an example. Note that, here, grid arrangement processing is performed using the connection path information in FIG. 10 and the network configuration information in FIG. 11 .
(2-1)网络框格配置处理(2-1) Network frame configuration processing
首先,根据储存在联机网络结构信息保持部116中的图11的网络结构信息,提取数据类别为“网络”的控制器间网络No.1、控制器间网络No.2、现场网络、信息系统网络No.3的网络数据M1、M2、C、E3。First, based on the network configuration information in FIG. 11 stored in the online network configuration
接着,根据上述规则,将提取到的网络以网络类别进行排序。即,按照信息系统网络No.3、控制器间网络No.1、控制器间网络No.2以及现场网络的顺序进行排序。此外,由于仅控制器间网络存在控制器间网络No.1和控制器间网络No.2这2个网络,所以在这里按照网络序号顺序进行排序,然后进一步对该控制器间网络的顺序进行排序。Then, according to the above rules, the extracted networks are sorted by network category. That is, they are sorted in the order of information system network No. 3, inter-controller network No. 1, inter-controller network No. 2, and field network. In addition, since there are only two networks, inter-controller network No. 1 and inter-controller network No. 2, in the inter-controller network, they are sorted here in order of network numbers, and then the order of the inter-controller networks is further sorted. Sort.
首先,其它网络连接PLC提取单元11721参照联机网络结构信息保持部116的网络数据M1,提取与控制器间网络No.1连接的PLC。其结果得到PLC 10-3、10-1、10-4。相同地,提取与控制器间网络No.2连接的PLC,其结果得到PLC 10-2、10-1、10-5。First, the other network connection
在这里,对提取到的PLC中的还与其它现场网络连接的PLC的数量进行计数。在提取到的PLC中,还与现场网络连接的PLC为PLC10-4、10-5。由此,还与其它现场网络连接的PLC的数量,对于控制器间网络No.1为PLC 10-4这1个,对于控制器间网络No.2为PLC 10-5这1个。网络类别排序单元11722将还与其它现场网络23连接的PLC的数量较多的网络向下侧排序,但在该基准下,由于两者的数量相同,所以无法对控制器间网络No.1和控制器间网络No.2进行排序。Here, among the extracted PLCs, the number of PLCs connected to another field network is counted. Among the extracted PLCs, PLCs still connected to the field network are PLC10-4 and PLC10-5. Therefore, the number of PLCs connected to another field network is one PLC 10-4 for inter-controller network No. 1, and one PLC 10-5 for inter-controller network No. 2. The network
接着,对提取到的PLC中还与其它信息系统网络连接的PLC的数量进行计数。在提取到的PLC中,还与信息系统网络连接的PLC为PLC 10-1、10-2。由此,还与其它信息系统网络连接的PLC的数量,对于控制器间网络No.1为PLC 10-1这1个,对于控制器间网络No.2为PLC 10-1、10-2这2个。由此,网络类别排序单元11722将还与其它信息系统网络连接的PLC的数量较多的网络向上侧排序,根据该基准,将控制器间网络No.2排序在控制器间网络No.1的上方。Next, count the number of PLCs that are still connected to other information system networks among the extracted PLCs. Among the extracted PLCs, the PLCs still connected to the information system network are PLCs 10-1 and 10-2. Therefore, the number of PLCs connected to other information system networks is one PLC 10-1 for inter-controller network No. 1, and PLC 10-1 and 10-2 for inter-controller network No. 2 2. As a result, the
由此,由于排序完成,所以在这里,无需按照与其它控制器间网络连接的PLC的数量进行排序。Thereby, since the sorting is completed, there is no need to sort by the number of PLCs connected to the network between other controllers.
然后,网络框格配置功能模块1172以排序完成后的顺序配置网络框格,并储存在网络框格保持功能模块1171中。图24是表示本实施方式2所涉及的网络框格配置处理的结果的图。Then, the network grid
(2-2)PLC框格配置处理(2-2) PLC frame configuration processing
图25-1~图25-5是表示本实施方式2所涉及的PLC框格配置处理的步骤的一个例子的图。下面,参照上述图25-1~图25-5,对PLC框格的配置处理进行说明。25-1 to 25-5 are diagrams showing an example of the procedure of the PLC grid arrangement process according to the second embodiment. Next, with reference to the aforementioned FIGS. 25-1 to 25-5 , the arrangement process of the PLC grid will be described.
首先,显示对象坐标计算部117的PLC框格配置功能模块1173从图11的联机网络结构信息保持部116中,提取数据类别为“PLC网络”的连接网络信息P3n、P1n、P4n、P2n、P5n。First, the PLC grid
接着,从提取到的连接网络信息中,取得与在图24中配置在最下位的网络即现场网络连接的PLC。在这里,取得PLC 10-4(连接网络信息P4n)和PLC 10-5(连接网络信息P5n)。在这些PLC 10-4(主站点)和PLC 10-5(本地站点1)中,从站点序号较小的PLC开始进行处理,但在这里,由于是现场网络,所以首先处理主站点,然后按照本地站点的站点序号顺序进行处理。由此,按照PLC10-4→PLC 10-5的顺序进行处理。Next, from the extracted connection network information, the PLC connected to the field network which is the lowest network arranged in FIG. 24 is acquired. Here, PLC 10-4 (network connection information P4n) and PLC 10-5 (network connection information P5n) are acquired. Among these PLC 10-4 (main station) and PLC 10-5 (local station 1), the processing starts from the PLC with the smaller station number, but here, since it is a field network, the main station is processed first, and then follows Local stations are processed in station sequence order. Thus, processing is performed in the order of PLC10-4→PLC10-5.
将PLC 10-4框格和配线框格a在图24的现场网络框格的左下方连续配置。此外,如图11的连接网络信息P4n所示,由于PLC 10-4也与控制器间网络No.1连接,所以从PLC 10-4框格至控制器间网络No.1框格之间配置配线框格a。此时,使PLC 10-4框格、各个网络框格和各个配线框格的宽度相同。该结果在图25-1中示出。The PLC 10-4 grid and the wiring grid a are arranged consecutively at the lower left of the field network grid in FIG. 24 . In addition, as shown in the connection network information P4n in Fig. 11, since PLC 10-4 is also connected to inter-controller network No. Wiring frame a. At this time, make the PLC 10-4 grid, each network grid and each wiring grid have the same width. The result is shown in Fig. 25-1.
接着,进行本地站点即PLC 10-5的处理。将PLC 10-5框格和配线框格b在图25-1的现场网络框格的左下方连续配置。此时,在现场网络框格上已经配置了PLC 10-4的配线框格a,作为PLC 10-5的配置候补具有“PLC 10-4的左侧”和“PLC 10-4的右侧”,该配置候补不会将已经配置在位于该网络下位的网络中的PLC的配置关系割断开。上述配置均是相对于与现场网络连接的PLC 10-4最近邻地进行配置的配置候补。并且,由于PLC 10-4为主站点,PLC 10-5为本地站点且其站点序号为1,所以其中遵循站点序号顺序的配置为“PLC 10-4的右侧”。由此,在该位置上配置PLC 10-5框格和配线框格b。Next, the processing of the local station, that is, the PLC 10-5 is performed. Place the PLC 10-5 grid and the wiring grid b continuously on the lower left of the field network grid in Figure 25-1. At this time, the wiring frame a of PLC 10-4 has been configured on the field network frame, and there are "left side of PLC 10-4" and "right side of PLC 10-4" as configuration candidates for PLC 10-5. ", this configuration candidate will not disconnect the configuration relationship of PLCs that have already been configured in the lower-level network of this network. All of the above configurations are configuration candidates for the nearest neighbor configuration of the PLC 10-4 connected to the field network. And, since PLC 10-4 is the main station, PLC 10-5 is the local station and its station number is 1, so the configuration following the order of the station numbers is "the right side of PLC 10-4". Therefore, configure the PLC 10-5 grid and the wiring grid b at this position.
此外,如图11的连接网络信息所示,由于PLC 10-5也与控制器间网络No.2连接,所以从PLC 10-5框格至控制器间网络No.2框格之间也配置配线框格b。此时,位于现场网络的上位的网络框格的横向宽度延伸,以包含PLC 10-4框格和PLC 10-5框格。其结果在图25-2中示出。由于与现场网络连接的PLC至此为止,所以现场网络23中的PLC框格和配线框格的配置处理完成。In addition, as shown in the connection network information in Fig. 11, since PLC 10-5 is also connected to inter-controller network No. Wiring frame b. At this time, the horizontal width of the upper network grid on the field network extends to include the PLC 10-4 grid and the PLC 10-5 grid. The result is shown in Figure 25-2. Since the PLCs connected to the field network have come to this point, the configuration process of the PLC grid and the wiring grid in the
接着,根据图24(图25-2)作为配置在现场网络的上位的网络而选择控制器间网络No.1。与控制器间网络No.1连接的PLC为PLC 10-1(站点序号2)、PLC 10-3(站点序号1)、PLC 10-4(站点序号3),其中尚未配置的是PLC 10-1和PLC 10-3。由此,针对这些PLC 10-1、10-3进行PLC框格的配置处理。在这里,按照站点序号从小到大的顺序,即按照PLC 10-3→PLC 10-1的顺序进行处理。Next, according to FIG. 24 ( FIG. 25 - 2 ), an inter-controller network No. 1 is selected as a higher-level network arranged on the field network. The PLCs connected to the inter-controller network No.1 are PLC 10-1 (station number 2), PLC 10-3 (station number 1), and PLC 10-4 (station number 3), among which PLC 10- 1 and PLC 10-3. Accordingly, the configuration processing of the PLC grid is performed for these PLCs 10-1 and 10-3. Here, process according to the order of the station serial number from small to large, that is, according to the order of PLC 10-3→PLC 10-1.
首先,将PLC 10-3框格和配线框格c在图25-2的控制器间网络No.1框格的左下方连续配置。此时,在控制器间网络No.1上已经配置了PLC 10-4、PLC 10-5的配线框格a、b,作为PLC 10-3的配置候补具有“PLC 10-4的左侧”和“PLC 10-5的右侧”,其中,该配置候补不会将已经配置在位于该网络下位的网络(现场网络)中的PLC 10-4框格和PLC 10-5框格的配置关系割断开。其中相对于与控制器间网络No.1连接的PLC 10-4最近邻地进行配置的配置候补为“PLC 10-4的左侧”。由此,在该位置上配置PLC 10-3框格和配线框格c。其结果在图25-3中示出。First, the PLC 10-3 grid and the wiring grid c are continuously arranged on the lower left of the grid No. 1 of the inter-controller network in Fig. 25-2. At this time, PLC 10-4 and PLC 10-5 wiring frames a and b have been placed on the inter-controller network No. 1, and "PLC 10-4's left side " and "the right side of PLC 10-5", where the configuration candidate does not change the configuration of the PLC 10-4 grid and the PLC 10-5 grid that have been configured in the network (field network) located below the network The relationship is severed. Among them, the placement candidate for the nearest neighbor of PLC 10-4 connected to the inter-controller network No. 1 is "the left side of PLC 10-4". Therefore, the PLC 10-3 grid and the wiring grid c are arranged at this position. The result is shown in Figure 25-3.
接着,进行站点序号次大的PLC 10-1框格的配置处理。将PLC10-1框格和配线框格d在图25-3的控制器间网络No.1框格的左下方连续配置。此时,在控制器间网络No.1上已经配置了PLC 10-3、10-4、10-5的配线框格c、a、b,作为PLC 10-1的配置候补具有“PLC 10-3的左侧”、“PLC 10-3的右侧(=PLC 10-4的左侧)”和“PLC 10-5的右侧”,其中,该配置候补不会将已经配置在位于该网络下位的网络(现场网络)中的PLC 10-4框格和PLC 10-5框格的配置关系割断开。其中,相对于与控制器间网络No.1连接的PLC 10-3、10-4最近邻地进行配置,并且与已经配置在控制器间网络No.1上的PLC 10-3(站点序号1)和PLC 10-4(站点序号3)之间最遵循序号顺序的配置是“PLC 10-3的右侧”。由此,在该位置上配置PLC 10-1框格和配线框格d。Next, the configuration processing of the PLC 10-1 grid with the second highest station number is performed. The PLC10-1 grid and the wiring grid d are continuously arranged on the lower left of the grid No. 1 of the inter-controller network in Fig. 25-3. At this time, the wiring frames c, a, and b of PLC 10-3, 10-4, and 10-5 have been configured on the inter-controller network No. 1, and "PLC 10 -3's left side", "PLC 10-3's right side (=PLC 10-4's left side)" and "PLC 10-5's right side", wherein, this configuration candidate will not The configuration relationship between the PLC 10-4 grid and the PLC 10-5 grid in the lower network (field network) is disconnected. Among them, the PLC 10-3 and 10-4 connected to the inter-controller network No. ) and PLC 10-4 (station number 3) is the configuration that most follows the serial number order is "the right side of PLC 10-3". Therefore, the PLC 10-1 grid and the wiring grid d are arranged at this position.
此外,如图11的连接网络信息P1n所示,由于PLC 10-1也与控制器间网络No.2和信息系统网络No.3连接,所以从PLC 10-1框格至控制器间网络No.2框格和信息系统网络No.3框格也配置配线框格d。其结果在图25-4中示出。由于与控制器间网络No.1框格连接的PLC至此为止,所以控制器间网络No.1中的PLC框格和配线框格的配置处理完成。In addition, as shown in the connection network information P1n in Fig. 11, since the PLC 10-1 is also connected to the inter-controller network No. 2 and the information system network No. 3, the network No. .2 sash and information system network No. 3 sash is also equipped with wiring sash d. The result is shown in Figure 25-4. Since the PLC connected to the inter-controller network No. 1 grid ends here, the arrangement process of the PLC grid and the wiring grid in the inter-controller network No. 1 is completed.
接着,根据图24(图25-4)作为配置在控制器间网络No.1的上位的网络而选择控制器间网络No.2。与控制器间网络No.2连接的PLC为PLC 10-1(站点序号2)、PLC 10-2(站点序号1)、PLC10-5(站点序号3),它们中尚未配置的是PLC 10-2。由此,针对该PLC 10-2进行PLC框格和配线框格的配置处理。在这里,在没有配置的PLC具有多个的情况下,从站点序号较小的PLC开始进行处理。另外,在控制器间网络的情况下,与管理站点、普通站点无关地按照站点序号顺序进行处理。Next, an inter-controller network No. 2 is selected as a network arranged on a higher level than the inter-controller network No. 1 based on FIG. 24 ( FIG. 25 - 4 ). The PLCs connected to the inter-controller network No. 2 are PLC 10-1 (station number 2), PLC 10-2 (station number 1), PLC10-5 (station number 3), among which the one that has not been configured is PLC 10- 2. Accordingly, the arrangement processing of the PLC grid and the wiring grid is performed for the PLC 10-2. Here, when there are a plurality of unplaced PLCs, the processing is performed starting from the PLC with the smaller station number. In addition, in the case of an inter-controller network, processing is performed in order of station numbers regardless of management stations and normal stations.
将PLC 10-2框格和配线框格e在图25-4的控制器间网络No.2框格的左下方连续配置。此时,在控制器间网络No.2上已经配置了PLC 10-1、10-5的配线框格d、b,作为PLC 10-2的配置候补具有“控制器间网络No.2下方的与PLC 10-1连接的配线d的左侧的空余框格”、“控制器间网络No.2下方的与PLC 10-1连接的配线d和与PLC 10-5连接的配线b之间的空余框格”、和“控制器间网络No.2下方的与PLC 10-5连接的配线b的右侧”,其中,该配置候补不会将已经配置在位于该网络下位的网络(控制器间网络No.1和现场网络)中的PLC 10-3、10-1、10-4、10-5的配置关系割断开。其中,相对于与控制器间网络No.2连接的PLC 10-1最邻近地配置的配置候补为“控制器间网络No.2下方的与PLC 10-1连接的配线d和与PLC 10-5连接的配线b之间的空余框格”。此外,在这里,由于从上述的候补中,无法针对已经在控制器间网络No.2中配置的PLC 10-1(站点序号2)和PLC 10-5(站点序号3)提取出最遵循站点序号顺序的配置候补,所以选择上述的“控制器间网络No.2下方的与PLC 10-1连接的配线d和与PLC 10-5连接的配线b之间的空余框格”。由此,在该位置上配置PLC 10-2框格和配线框格e。其结果在图25-5中示出。Arrange the PLC 10-2 grid and the wiring grid e continuously at the lower left of the No. 2 grid of the inter-controller network in Figure 25-4. At this time, the wiring grids d and b of PLC 10-1 and 10-5 have been configured on the inter-controller network No. Wiring d connected to PLC 10-1 in the left empty frame", "Wiring d connected to PLC 10-1 under inter-controller network No. 2 and wiring connected to PLC 10-5 b" and "the right side of wiring b connected to PLC 10-5 under inter-controller network No. The configuration relationships of PLCs 10-3, 10-1, 10-4, and 10-5 in the network (inter-controller network No.1 and field network) are disconnected. Among them, the placement candidate for the nearest neighbor to PLC 10-1 connected to inter-controller network No. 2 is "the wiring d connected to PLC 10-1 under inter-controller network No. - Empty sash between wiring b connected to -5". In addition, here, from the above-mentioned candidates, it is impossible to extract the most compliant station for PLC 10-1 (station number 2) and PLC 10-5 (station number 3) already configured in inter-controller network No. 2 As for the placement candidates in the order of serial numbers, select the above-mentioned "empty frame between the wiring d connected to PLC 10-1 and the wiring b connected to PLC 10-5 under inter-controller network No. 2". Therefore, the PLC 10-2 grid and the wiring grid e are arranged at this position. The result is shown in Figure 25-5.
其后,根据图24(图25-5)作为配置在控制器间网络No.2的上位的网络而选择信息系统网络No.3,但在与该信息系统网络No.3连接的PLC 10-1、10-2中,没有尚未配置的PLC。并且,由于该信息系统网络21是最上位的网络,所以PLC框格配置处理完成。Then, according to Fig. 24 (Fig. 25-5), the information system network No. 3 is selected as the upper network arranged on the inter-controller network No. 1. In 10-2, there is no unconfigured PLC. And, since this
其后,如实施方式1中所说明的那样,针对图25-5的结果,通过框格尺寸计算功能模块1174而进行对各个框格的尺寸(特别地,对于PLC框格,是根据PLC的基板信息来计算显示PLC所需的尺寸)进行计算的框格尺寸计算处理,从左上侧开始顺次加上框格尺寸而进行计算框格坐标的框格坐标计算处理。图26是表示针对图25-5的结果而计算出框格尺寸和框格坐标的结果的图。Thereafter, as described in
然后,系统结构显示部118读取添加了由上述处理得到的框格坐标的框格模型,在显示部112中显示系统结构信息。图27是表示通过系统结构显示处理而显示的系统结构信息的一个例子的图。在该显示画面中,由于以接近由人工生成的控制系统的网络结构图的状态进行显示,即,在上位显示信息系统网络,在中位显示控制器间网络,在下位显示现场网络,所以与实施方式1的情况相比较,具有使用者容易根据网络结构把握控制系统的结构的效果。Then, the system
根据本实施方式2,由于将收集到的网络结构信息以使用者易于把握的网络顺序进行显示,所以具有易于对构成控制系统的网络及PLC的系统结构整体进行把握的效果。According to
图28是表示控制系统的其它的结构例的图。该图28与表示构成实施方式1所述控制系统的网络及PLC的系统结构整体的例子的图1相比较,由大量PLC构成复杂的控制系统。对于将该图28这样的控制系统的系统结构信息以实施方式1的方法进行显示的情况,和以实施方式2的方法进行显示的情况进行比较。FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another configuration example of the control system. This FIG. 28 is compared with FIG. 1 showing an example of the overall system configuration of the network and PLCs constituting the control system described in
图29是表示以实施方式1的方法对图28的控制系统进行显示的系统结构的图。另外,图30是表示对于图28的控制系统以实施方式2的方法生成的框格模型的图,图31是表示基于图30的框格模型而显示的图28的控制系统的系统结构的图。FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a system configuration for displaying the control system in FIG. 28 by the method of the first embodiment. In addition, FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a grid model generated by the method of
与通过实施方式1的方法显示的图29的系统结构的显示画面相比,通过实施方式2的方法显示的图31的系统结构的显示画面,由于将构成控制系统的上位信息系统的网络显示在画面的上方,将构成系统的下位现场系统的网络显示在下方,并且,将与同一个网络连接的PLC汇总显示,所以更加容易明白。即,与通过实施方式1的方法显示的图29的系统结构的显示画面相比,通过实施方式2的方法显示的图31,其表现形式更接近于使用者容易明白的、手工描绘出的图28的系统构成图。即,根据本实施方式2,可以自动地显示表现形式更接近于人容易明白的、手工描绘出的系统结构图的系统结构信息。Compared with the display screen of the system configuration of FIG. 29 displayed by the method of
实施方式3
在该实施方式3中说明下述控制系统设计装置及控制系统设计方法,其对于实施方式1、2中通过哪个通路与目标PLC连接,可以显示具体的连接通路。此外,在以下的说明中,利用实施方式1的结果进行说明。In this third embodiment, a control system design device and a control system design method will be described, which can display a specific connection path through which path to connect to the target PLC in the first and second embodiments. In addition, in the following description, the result of
图32是示意地表示本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置的实施方式3的功能结构的框图。本控制系统设计装置100在实施方式1的图3的基础上,还具有连接通路显示部120,其根据包含由显示对象坐标计算部117计算出的坐标在内的数据、和由联机连接通路保持部115保持的连接通路,在显示部112上显示从起点PLC至目的PLC的连接通路。该连接通路显示部120对应于权利要求书中的连接通路显示单元。此外,对于与实施方式1相同的结构要素标注相同标号,并省略其说明。FIG. 32 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional configuration of
接着,针对具有上述结构的控制系统设计装置100中的从起点PLC至对象PLC为止的连接通路的显示处理进行说明。图33是表示连接通路显示处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。另外,图34-1~图34-5是表示在系统结构信息显示画面中的连接通路显示处理的步骤的一个例子的图。此外,本处理是在实施方式1、2中进行系统结构信息的显示处理的状态下执行的。Next, the display process of the connection path from a starting point PLC to a target PLC in the control
首先,连接通路显示部120从显示对象坐标计算部117取得起点PLC这一对象在显示部112上的位置,突出显示起点PLC这一对象的整体(步骤S271、图34-1)。First, the connection
接着,从储存在联机连接通路保持部115中的连接通路中选择被指定的或者某1个连接通路信息(步骤S272)。选择从所选择的连接通路信息中的起点PLC至记载于数据1中的网络的配线(步骤S273)。然后,从显示对象坐标计算部117取得与该配线对应的在显示部112上的位置,并突出描绘(步骤S274、图34-2)。Next, the specified or one piece of connection path information is selected from the connection paths stored in the online connection path holding unit 115 (step S272 ). The wiring from the starting point PLC in the selected connection path information to the network described in the
然后,连接通路显示部120选择将连接通路信息中的数据1所记载的网络与数据2所记载的PLC进行连结的配线(步骤S275)。然后,从显示对象坐标计算部117取得与该配线对应的在显示部112上的位置,并突出描绘(步骤S276、图34-3)。Then, the connection path display
接着,连接通路显示部120将突出描绘的2根配线之间的网络部分进行突出描绘(步骤S277、图34-4)。然后,对在数据2中记载的PLC是否为连接通路信息的名称栏中的PLC(终点PLC)进行判定(步骤S278)。Next, the connection
在记载在数据2中的PLC不是终点PLC的情况(在步骤S278中为否的情况)下,连接通路显示部120设定n=1、m=2(步骤S279),选择将连接通路信息中的数据2n所记载的PLC和数据2n+1所记载的网络进行连结的配线(步骤S280)。然后,从显示对象坐标计算部取得与该配线对应的在显示部112上的位置,并突出描绘(步骤S281)。When the PLC described in the
接着,连接通路显示部120选择将连接通路信息中的数据2m-1所记载的网络和2m所记载的PLC进行连结的配线(步骤S282)。然后,从显示对象坐标计算部117取得与该配线对应的在显示部112上的位置,并突出描绘(步骤S283)。然后,连接通路显示部120将突出描绘的2根配线之间的网络部分进行突出描绘(步骤S284)。Next, the connection path display
然后,对记载在数据2m中的PLC是否为连接通路信息的名称栏中的PLC(终点PLC)进行判定(步骤S285)。在记载在数据2m中的PLC不是终点PLC的情况(在步骤S285中为否的情况)下,连接通路显示部120在设定n=n+1、m=m+1之后(步骤S286),返回步骤S280,重复执行上述处理。Then, it is determined whether or not the PLC described in the data 2m is the PLC (end point PLC) in the name column of the connection path information (step S285 ). When the PLC described in the data 2m is not the destination PLC (No in step S285), the connection
另外,在步骤S278中,在记载在数据2中的PLC为终点PLC的情况(在步骤S278中为是的情况)下,或者在步骤S285中,在记载在数据2m中的PLC为终点PLC的情况(步骤S285中为是的情况)下,从起点PLC至作为目标的终点PLC之间的连接通路的显示处理完成(图34-5)。In addition, in step S278, in the case where the PLC described in the
根据本实施方式3,具有以下效果,即,在构成控制系统的网络中,可以容易地确认从起点PLC至终点PLC的连接通路。According to the third embodiment, there is an effect that the connection path from the start point PLC to the end point PLC can be easily confirmed in the network constituting the control system.
实施方式4
在实施方式1~3中,在构成实际的控制系统的PLC上连接控制系统设计装置,经由该PLC在联机状态下取得控制系统的网络结构及PLC的系统结构的信息,从而显示系统结构信息。与此相对,在本实施方式4中对下述控制系统设计装置及控制系统设计方法进行说明,其可以对在脱机状态下编辑获得的系统结构图,判定出能够到达的PLC,并且在存在多个连接通路时,参照通信吞吐量而自动地选择最佳通路。In
图35是示意地表示本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置的实施方式4的功能结构的框图。该控制系统设计装置100具有通信部111、显示部112、起点PLC指定部113、系统结构编辑部121、脱机网络结构信息保持部122、连接通路解析选择部123、吞吐量模型保持部124、脱机连接通路保持部125、显示对象坐标计算部117、系统结构显示部118、连接通路显示部120、以及控制上述各个处理部的控制部119。FIG. 35 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional configuration of
系统结构编辑部121在该控制系统设计装置100上,在脱机状态下向使用者提供对构成生产设备等的控制系统的网络及PLC的系统结构整体进行设定的画面,并且对由使用者所设定的内容进行管理。该系统结构编辑部121对应于权利要求书中的系统结构编辑单元。The system
脱机网络结构信息保持部122保持连接网络信息及网络结构信息,其中,该连接网络信息是由使用者从系统结构编辑部121直接设定的,表示构成控制系统的PLC与网络之间的连接状态,该网络结构信息包含表示PLC系统结构(安装在基板上的单元的结构)的基板信息在内。在该脱机网络结构信息保持部122中所保持的包含连接网络信息和网络结构信息在内的网络结构信息,由于并非该控制系统设计装置100自动地在联机状态下收集系统结构信息并生成网络信息而得到的,而是由使用者向控制系统设计装置100直接输入(在脱机状态下)针对现有的控制系统的系统结构信息及网络信息而得到的,所以下面也称为脱机网络结构信息。该脱机网络结构信息保持部122对应于权利要求书中的脱机网络结构信息保持单元。The off-line network configuration
连接通路解析选择部123将由起点PLC指定部113所设定的PLC作为起点,在由系统结构编辑部121所设定的网络结构中对连接至各个PLC的连接通路进行解析。另外,还具有下述功能,即,在存在多个连接通路的情况下,参照吞吐量模型保持部124的网络通信吞吐量数据库,选择最佳通路。该连接通路解析选择部123对应于权利要求书中的连接通路解析选择单元。The connection path
吞吐量模型保持部124将在对控制系统的各个连接通路中的通信吞吐量进行计算时的吞吐量模型作为数据库进行保持。该吞吐量模型保持部124对应于权利要求书中的吞吐量模型保持单元。The throughput
脱机连接通路保持部125对由连接通路解析选择部123解析及选择出的连接至各个PLC的连接通路(以下也称为脱机连接通路)进行保持。该脱机连接通路的特征在于,在实施方式1的图10的连接通路信息的数据结构中,还包含吞吐量评价值。该脱机连接通路保持部125对应于权利要求书中的脱机连接通路保持单元。The offline connection
此外,针对与实施方式1~3相同的结构要素标注相同标号,并省略其说明。但是,在本实施方式4中,显示对象坐标计算部117利用由脱机网络结构信息保持部122所保持的网络结构信息,计算在显示部112上显示的显示对象的坐标。In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same component as Embodiment 1-3, and description is abbreviate|omitted. However, in
接着,针对在具有上述结构的控制系统设计装置100中,从脱机状态下的控制系统结构处理至脱机状态下的连接通路显示处理顺次进行说明。Next, in the control
(脱机状态下的控制系统结构处理)(control system structure processing in offline state)
在系统结构编辑部121中,通过在图形用户界面下的拖放和向导(Wizard),而对由使用者输入的构成控制系统的网络及PLC的系统结构整体进行设定。In the system
由系统结构编辑部121设定的系统结构数据(以下称为脱机网络结构信息),由脱机网络结构信息保持部122保持。该数据形式与在实施方式1中说明的由联机网络结构信息保持部116保持的网络结构信息相同。例如,如果进行追加1个要素(网络或者PLC)的操作,则将该要素的数据向由脱机网络结构信息保持部122所保持的脱机网络结构信息追加。接着,针对追加了要素的数据之后的系统结构数据整体,由显示对象坐标计算部117进行计算坐标的处理,并将系统结构显示在显示部112上。由此,在表现相同系统结构的情况下,虽然根据数据追加的操作顺序不同而所生成的数据顺序不同,但数据的内容(数据所表现的意义)相同。The system configuration data (hereinafter referred to as offline network configuration information) set by the system
此外,在本实施方式4中,通过以下步骤在脱机状态下构筑与实施方式1的图1相同的控制系统结构。首先,追加PLC 10-3,然后,在追加了控制器间网络No.1(22A)之后,顺次追加PLC 10-1和PLC 10-4。然后,追加控制器间网络No.2(22B),顺次追加PLC10-2和PLC 10-5。然后,在追加了现场网络(23)之后,追加信息网络No.3(21)。In addition, in this
其结果,由脱机网络结构信息保持部122保持的脱机网络结构信息的数据内容与图11相同,系统结构的显示也与图20(如果利用实施方式2的方法,则为图27)相同。以下,将图20或图27这样的在显示部112上显示的系统结构的画面称为系统结构图。As a result, the data content of the offline network configuration information held by the offline network configuration
(脱机连接通路解析处理)(Offline connection path analysis processing)
(1)处理的概要(1) Outline of processing
对于在脱机状态下编辑而成的系统结构图,将作为起点的PLC(控制系统设计装置100与哪个PLC连接)通过起点PLC指定部113进行指定。然后,连接通路解析选择部123将由起点PLC指定部113所设定的PLC作为起点,对由系统结构编辑部121所设定的网络结构中的连接至各个PLC的连接通路进行解析。以下说明该处理的详细内容。With respect to the system configuration diagram edited in the offline state, the PLC (to which PLC the control
图36-1~图36-3是表示脱机连接通路解析处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。首先,在由起点PLC指定部113指定了与该控制系统设计装置100进行连接的连接对象PLC(起点PLC)后(步骤S311),连接通路解析选择部123将连接至被指定的起点PLC为止的连接通路进行输出(步骤S312)。然后,将被指定的起点PLC选择作为处理对象PLC(步骤S313),针对该所选择的PLC,执行图36-2所示的B1处理(步骤S314),脱机连接通路解析处理完成。36-1 to 36-3 are flowcharts showing an example of an offline connection path analysis processing procedure. First, when the connection target PLC (origin PLC) connected to the control
图36-2是表示步骤S314中的B1处理的步骤的流程图。首先,连接通路解析选择部123对作为处理对象的PLC所连接的网络进行收集(步骤S331)。更具体地说,从脱机网络结构信息保持部122收集作为处理对象的PLC的连接网络信息。然后,对连接至信息收集到的各个网络的连接通路是否构成环路的情况进行判定(步骤S332)。在这里,是否为环路的判定如下所示,在连接通路中含有多个相同要素的情况下判定为环路,在除此之外的情况下判定为并非环路。FIG. 36-2 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the B1 process in step S314. First, the connection path
在连接通路并非环路的情况(在步骤S332中为否的情况)下,对在图12的限制下是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集进行判定(步骤S333)。在可以对网络继续进行信息收集的情况(在步骤S333中为是的情况)下,将该网络选择作为进行处理的对象网络(步骤S334),执行图36-3所示的B2处理(步骤S335)。另外,在步骤S333中,在符合图12的限制而无法对网络继续进行信息收集的情况(步骤S333中为否的情况)下,或者在步骤S332中,连接通路为环路的情况(在步骤S332中为是的情况)下,结束B1处理,返回图35的处理。When the connection path is not a loop (NO in step S332 ), it is determined whether information collection can be continued with respect to the network under the restrictions in FIG. 12 (step S333 ). If the network can continue to collect information (Yes in step S333), select the network as the target network for processing (step S334), and execute the B2 process shown in Figure 36-3 (step S335 ). In addition, in step S333, in the case of conforming to the restriction in FIG. 12 and continuing to collect information on the network (No in step S333), or in step S332, the connection path is a loop (in step S332) (YES in S332), the process of B1 is terminated, and the process returns to the process of FIG. 35 .
图36-3是表示图36-2的步骤S335中的B2处理的步骤的一个例子的流程图。在该B2处理中,连接通路解析选择部123首先对与作为处理对象的网络连接的PLC进行收集(步骤S351)。具体地说,从脱机网络结构信息保持部122取得作为处理对象的网络的网络信息,从该网络信息中收集与作为处理对象的网络连接的PLC。然后,对连接至信息收集到的各个PLC为止的连接通路是否构成环路进行判定(步骤S352)。FIG. 36-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the B2 process in step S335 of FIG. 36-2. In the B2 process, the connection path
在连接通路没有构成环路的情况(在步骤S352中为否的情况)下,对是否为最佳连接通路进行判定(步骤S353)。是否为最佳连接通路的判定如下述进行,在存在多个连接通路的情况下,参照吞吐量模型保持部124保持的通信吞吐量信息,对是否为通信吞吐量较好的连接通路进行判定。其结果,在不是最佳连接通路的情况(在步骤S353中为否的情况)下,不输出该连接通路而结束B1处理,返回图36-2的处理。When the connection path does not constitute a loop (NO in step S352 ), it is determined whether or not it is an optimal connection path (step S353 ). Whether or not it is an optimal connection path is determined as follows. When there are a plurality of connection paths, it is determined whether or not it is a connection path with better communication throughput by referring to the communication throughput information held by the throughput
另外,在为最佳连接通路的情况(在步骤S353中为是的情况)下,将该连接通路向脱机连接通路保持部125输出(步骤S354),对在图12的限制下是否可以针对与该PLC连接的网络继续进行信息收集进行判定(步骤S355)。在无法对网络继续进行信息收集的情况(在步骤S355中为否的情况)下,B2处理完成,返回图36-2的处理。另外,在可以对与该PLC连接的网络继续进行信息收集的情况(在步骤S355中为是的情况)下,将该PLC选择作为处理对象(步骤S356),执行图36-2的B1处理(步骤S357)。In addition, if it is an optimal connection path (YES in step S353), the connection path is output to the offline connection path holding unit 125 (step S354), and whether it is possible to The network connected to the PLC continues to collect information for judgment (step S355 ). When it is impossible to continue collecting information on the network (NO in step S355), the process of B2 is completed, and the process returns to the process of FIG. 36-2. In addition, in the case where information collection can be continued on the network connected to the PLC (YES in step S355), the PLC is selected as the processing target (step S356), and the B1 process of FIG. 36-2 is executed ( Step S357).
另外,在步骤S352中,在连接至PLC的连接通路构成环路的情况(在步骤S352中为是的情况)下,不输出该连接通路而结束B1处理,返回图36-2的处理。In addition, in step S352, when the connection path connected to PLC constitutes a loop (YES in step S352), the B1 process is complete|finished without outputting this connection path, and it returns to the process of FIG. 36-2.
(2)处理的具体例子(2) Specific examples of processing
由于在上述的说明中,对脱机连接通路解析处理的概要进行了记述,所以例举具有图1的结构的控制系统的情况,对该处理的具体例子如下进行说明。图37-1~图37-5是表示作为连接通路解析选择处理的结果,在脱机连接通路保持部中保持的连接通路保持信息的一个例子的图。另外,在这里,脱机网络结构信息保持部122保持图11的网络结构信息。这些图11和图37-1~图37-5所示的数据,按照数据生成的顺序示出。另外,在这里应用图12所示的限制作为限制。In the above description, the outline of the offline connection path analysis process has been described, so a specific example of the process will be described below by taking the case of the control system having the configuration of FIG. 1 as an example. 37-1 to 37-5 are diagrams showing examples of connection path holding information held in the offline connection path holding unit as a result of the connection path analysis selection process. In addition, here, the offline network configuration
图38是表示本实施方式4所涉及的吞吐量模型的例子的图。在本实施方式4中,将PLC的吞吐量设为1Mbps,将现场网络的吞吐量设为0.1Mbps,将控制器间网络的吞吐量设为10Mbps,将信息系统网络的吞吐量设为100Mbps。另外,连接通路整体吞吐量的评价值的计算方法是将连接通路中所包含的各要素的吞吐量值的倒数求和而求出的,该连接通路整体吞吐量的评价值较小者判定为吞吐量较好的连接通路。FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a throughput model according to the fourth embodiment. In
(2-1)PLC 10-3(2-1) PLC 10-3
首先,连接通路解析选择部123输出由起点PLC指定部113所指定的PLC 10-3的连接通路P3g。该连接通路是终点PLC与起点PLC同为PLC 10-3的连接通路。另外,如果参照吞吐量模型保持部124的图38的条件,对吞吐量评价值进行计算,则由于PLC 10-3是起点PLC,所以吞吐量评价值为0。其结果在图37-1中示出。另外,针对作为该起点PLC的PLC 10-3执行图36-2的B1处理。First, the connection path
(2-2)与PLC 10-3连接的网络(2-2) Network connected to PLC 10-3
在将PLC 10-3作为处理对象的B1处理中,收集PLC 10-3所连接的网络。具体地说,进行读出图11的脱机网络结构信息保持部122中的连接网络信息P3n的处理。在这里,收集到控制器间网络No.1。然后,生成连接至收集到的网络(控制器间网络No.1)为止的连接通路,对该连接通路是否为环路进行确认。在该情况下,由于连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1(22A)”,没有出现多个相同的PLC,所以并非环路。由此,根据图12所示的限制,确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。在这里,由于不符合限制,所以可以对网络继续进行信息收集,将控制器间网络No.1作为处理对象而执行图36-3的B2处理。In the B1 process in which the PLC 10-3 is the processing target, the network to which the PLC 10-3 is connected is collected. Specifically, a process of reading the connection network information P3n in the offline network configuration
(2-3)与控制器间网络No.1连接的PLC(2-3) PLC connected to controller network No.1
在将控制器间网络No.1作为处理对象的网络信息输出处理中,收集与控制器间网络No.1连接的PLC。具体地说,在图11的脱机网络结构信息保持部122中的网络数据M1中,检索并提取与控制器间网络No.1连接的PLC。在这里,作为与控制器间网络No.1连接的PLC,收集PLC 10-3、10-4、10-1。然后,生成连接至收集到的PLC的连接通路,对连接至各个PLC的连接通路是否为环路进行确认。在该PLC处理中不存在优先度,顺次进行处理。In the network information output process for which inter-controller network No. 1 is the processing target, PLCs connected to inter-controller network No. 1 are collected. Specifically, the PLC connected to the inter-controller network No. 1 is searched and extracted from the network data M1 in the offline network configuration
(2-4)控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-3(2-4) Network between controllers No.1→PLC 10-3
由于连接至PLC 10-3为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-3”,出现多个相同的PLC,所以成为环路。由此,不输出该连接通路,结束针对该PLC 10-3的处理。Since the connection path up to PLC 10-3 is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-3", multiple identical PLCs appear, so it becomes a loop. Accordingly, the connection path is not output, and the processing for the PLC 10-3 ends.
(2-5)控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-4(2-5) Network between controllers No.1→PLC 10-4
由于连接至PLC 10-4为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-4”,没有出现多个相同的要素,所以并非环路。由此,作为最佳连接通路而输出上述连接通路P4g。在这里,连接通路解析选择部123对该连接通路的吞吐量进行计算。如果参照图38,则由于连接至PLC 10-4为止的吞吐量评价值为Since the connection path up to PLC 10-4 is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-4", there are no multiple identical elements, so it is not a loop. Thereby, the above-mentioned connection path P4g is output as an optimum connection path. Here, the connection path
(1/1)+(1/10)+(1/1)=2.1,(1/1) + (1/10) + (1/1) = 2.1,
所以在输出时输入该吞吐量值。然后,根据图12示出的限制,确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。在这里,由于不符合限制,所以可以对网络继续进行信息收集,将PLC 10-4作为处理对象而执行图36-2的B1处理。So enter that throughput value on output. Then, according to the restrictions shown in FIG. 12 , it is confirmed whether information collection can be continued for the network. Here, since the restriction is not met, information collection on the network can be continued, and the process B1 in FIG. 36-2 can be executed with the PLC 10-4 as the processing target.
(2-6)与PLC 10-4连接的网络(2-6) Network connected to PLC 10-4
在将PLC 10-4作为处理对象的B1处理中,收集PLC 10-4所连接的网络。具体地说,进行读出在图11的脱机网络结构信息中的连接网络信息P4n中储存的网络的处理。在这里,作为与PLC 10-4连接的网络,收集现场网络和控制器间网络No.1。然后,生成连接至收集到的网络为止的连接通路,对该连接通路是否为环路进行确认。此外,在该网络处理中不存在优先度,顺次进行处理。In the B1 process in which the PLC 10-4 is the processing target, the network to which the PLC 10-4 is connected is collected. Specifically, a process of reading out the network stored in the connected network information P4n in the offline network configuration information in FIG. 11 is performed. Here, as a network connected to PLC 10-4, field network and inter-controller network No.1 are collected. Then, a connection path leading to the collected network is generated, and it is checked whether or not the connection path is a loop. In addition, there is no priority in this network processing, and processing is performed sequentially.
(2-7)PLC 10-4→现场网络(2-7) PLC 10-4 → field network
由于连接至现场网络23的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-4→现场网络”,没有出现多个相同的要素,所以并非环路。由此,根据图12示出的限制,确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。在这里,由于不符合限制,所以可以对网络继续进行信息收集,将现场网络选择作为处理对象,执行图36-3的B2处理。Since the connection path to the
(2-8)与现场网络连接的PLC(2-8) PLC connected to the field network
在将现场网络作为处理对象的B2处理中,收集与现场网络连接的PLC。具体地说,从图11的脱机网络结构信息中的网络数据C中检索并提取与现场网络连接的PLC。在这里,作为与现场网络连接的PLC,收集PLC 10-4、10-5。然后,生成连接至收集到的PLC为止的连接通路,对连接至各个PLC的连接通路是否为环路进行确认。在该PLC处理中不存在优先度,顺次进行处理。In the B2 process that makes the field network the processing target, PLCs connected to the field network are collected. Specifically, PLCs connected to the field network are retrieved and extracted from the network data C in the offline network configuration information of FIG. 11 . Here, PLCs 10-4 and 10-5 are collected as PLCs connected to the field network. Then, a connection path to the collected PLCs is generated, and it is checked whether or not the connection path to each PLC is a loop. There is no priority in this PLC processing, and processing is performed sequentially.
(2-9)现场网络→PLC 10-4(2-9) On-site network → PLC 10-4
由于连接至PLC 10-4为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-4→现场网络→PLC 10-4”,出现多个相同的PLC,所以为环路。由此,不输出该连接通路,结束针对该PLC 10-4的处理。Since the connection path up to PLC 10-4 is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-4→Field network→PLC 10-4", multiple identical PLCs appear, so it is a loop road. Accordingly, the connection path is not output, and the processing for the PLC 10-4 ends.
(2-10)现场网络→PLC 10-5(2-10) Field network → PLC 10-5
由于连接至PLC 10-5为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-4→现场网络→PLC 10-5”,没有出现多个相同的要素,所以并非环路。由此,作为最佳连接通路而输出上述连接通路P5g-1。在这里,连接通路解析选择部123对该连接通路的吞吐量进行计算。如果参照图38,则由于连接至PLC 10-5为止的吞吐量评价值为Since the connection path up to PLC 10-5 is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-4→Field network→PLC 10-5", there are no multiple identical elements, so it is not loop. Thereby, the said connection path P5g-1 is output as an optimal connection path. Here, the connection path
(1/1)+(1/10)+(1/1)+(1/0.1)+(1/1)=13.1,(1/1) + (1/10) + (1/1) + (1/0.1) + (1/1) = 13.1,
所以在输出时输入该吞吐量值。其结果在图37-3中示出。然后,根据图12所示的限制,确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。在这里,由于符合限制B,所以不执行图36-2的B1处理。由此,(2-8)的将现场网络作为处理对象的B2处理完成。So enter that throughput value on output. The result is shown in Figure 37-3. Then, according to the restrictions shown in Figure 12, check whether information collection can continue for the network. Here, since the constraint B is met, the B1 process in FIG. 36-2 is not executed. Thereby, the B2 process of (2-8) which makes an on-site network the processing target is completed.
(2-11)与控制器间网络No.1连接的PLC(2-11) PLC connected to the controller network No.1
由于连接至在(2-6)中作为与PLC 10-4连接的网络之一而被收集的控制器间网络No.1为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-4→控制器间网络No.1”,出现多个相同的网络,所以为环路。由此,不执行图36-3的B2处理。由此,(2-6)的将PLC 10-4作为处理对象的B1处理完成。The connection path up to the inter-controller network No. 1 collected as one of the networks connected to PLC 10-4 in (2-6) is "PLC 10-3 → inter-controller network No. 1 →PLC 10-4→Network No.1 between controllers, there are multiple identical networks, so it is a loop. Therefore, the B2 process of FIG. 36-3 is not performed. Thereby, the B1 process of (2-6) which makes PLC 10-4 the process target is completed.
(2-12)对于PLC 10-1(2-12) For PLC 10-1
由于连接至在(2-3)中作为与控制器间网络No.1连接的PLC之一而被收集的PLC 10-1为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1”,没有出现多个相同要素,所以并非环路。由此,作为最佳连接通路而输出上述连接通路P1g。在这里,连接通路解析选择部123对该连接通路的吞吐量进行计算。如果参照图38,则由于连接至PLC 10-1为止的吞吐量评价值为The connection path up to PLC 10-1 collected as one of the PLCs connected to the inter-controller network No. 1 in (2-3) is "PLC 10-3 → inter-controller network No. 1 →PLC 10-1", there are no multiple identical elements, so it is not a loop. Thereby, the above-mentioned connection path P1g is output as the optimal connection path. Here, the connection path
(1/1)+(1/10)+(1/1)=2.1,(1/1) + (1/10) + (1/1) = 2.1,
所以在输出时输入该吞吐量值。其结果在图37-4中示出。然后,根据图12所示的限制,确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。在这里,由于不符合限制,所以可以对网络继续进行信息收集,将PLC 10-1作为处理对象而执行图36-2的B1处理。So enter that throughput value on output. The result is shown in Figure 37-4. Then, according to the restrictions shown in Figure 12, check whether information collection can continue for the network. Here, since the restriction is not met, information collection on the network can be continued, and the process B1 in FIG. 36-2 can be executed with the PLC 10-1 as the processing target.
(2-13)与PLC 10-1连接的网络(2-13) Network connected to PLC 10-1
在将PLC 10-1作为处理对象的B1处理中,收集PLC 10-1所连接的网络。具体地说,进行读出在图11的脱机网络结构信息中储存的连接网络信息P1n中的网络信息的处理。在这里,作为与PLC10-1连接的网络,收集控制器间网络No.1、控制器间网络No.2及信息系统网络No.3。然后,生成连接至收集到的网络为止的连接通路,对该连接通路是否为环路进行确认。此外,在该网络处理中不存在优先度,顺次进行处理。In the process B1 in which the PLC 10-1 is processed, the network to which the PLC 10-1 is connected is collected. Specifically, a process of reading out the network information in the connection network information P1n stored in the offline network configuration information in FIG. 11 is performed. Here, inter-controller network No. 1, inter-controller network No. 2, and information system network No. 3 are collected as networks connected to PLC 10 - 1 . Then, a connection path leading to the collected network is generated, and it is checked whether or not the connection path is a loop. In addition, there is no priority in this network processing, and processing is performed sequentially.
(2-14)PLC 10-1→控制器间网络No.1(2-14) PLC 10-1→Network between controllers No.1
由于连接至控制器间网络No.1为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→控制器间网络No.1”,出现多个相同的网络,所以为环路。由此,不执行图36-3的B2处理。Since the connection route to the inter-controller network No.1 is "PLC 10-3 → inter-controller network No. 1 → PLC 10-1 → inter-controller network No. 1", multiple identical networks appear, So for the loop. Therefore, the B2 process of FIG. 36-3 is not performed.
(2-15)PLC 10-1→控制器间网络No.2(2-15) PLC 10-1→Network between controllers No.2
由于连接至控制器间网络No.2为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→控制器间网络No.2”,没有出现多个相同的要素,所以并非环路。由此,根据图12所示的限制,确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。在这里,由于不符合限制,所以可以对网络继续进行信息收集,将控制器间网络No.2选择作为处理对象,执行图36-3的B2处理。Since the connection path up to the inter-controller network No. 2 is "PLC 10-3 → inter-controller network No. 1 → PLC 10-1 → inter-controller network No. 2", multiple identical elements do not appear , so it is not a loop. Thereby, it is checked whether or not information collection can be continued on the network according to the restrictions shown in FIG. 12 . Here, since the restriction is not met, information collection can be continued on the network, and inter-controller network No. 2 is selected as the processing object, and B2 processing in Fig. 36-3 is executed.
(2-16)与控制器间网络No.2连接的PLC(2-16) PLC connected to the network No. 2 between controllers
在将控制器间网络No.2作为处理对象的B2处理中,收集与控制器间网络No.2连接的PLC。具体地说,从图11的脱机网络结构信息中的网络数据M2中,检索并提取与控制器间网络No.2连接的PLC。在这里,作为与控制器间网络No.2连接的PLC,收集PLC 10-2、10-1、10-5。然后,生成连接至收集到的PLC为止的连接通路,对连接至各个PLC的连接通路是否为环路进行确认。在该PLC处理中不存在优先度,顺次进行处理。In the B2 process that makes the inter-controller network No. 2 the processing target, PLCs connected to the inter-controller network No. 2 are collected. Specifically, the PLC connected to the inter-controller network No. 2 is retrieved and extracted from the network data M2 in the offline network configuration information of FIG. 11 . Here, PLCs 10-2, 10-1, and 10-5 are collected as PLCs connected to the inter-controller network No. 2. Then, a connection path to the collected PLCs is generated, and it is checked whether or not the connection path to each PLC is a loop. There is no priority in this PLC processing, and processing is performed sequentially.
(2-17)控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-2(2-17) Network between controllers No.2→PLC 10-2
由于连接至PLC 10-2为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-2”,没有出现多个相同的PLC,所以并非环路。由此,作为最佳连接通路而输出上述连接通路P2g-1。在这里,连接通路解析选择部123对该连接通路的吞吐量进行计算。如果参照图38,则由于连接至PLC 10-2为止的吞吐量评价值为Since the connection path up to PLC 10-2 is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-1→Inter-controller network No.2→PLC 10-2", multiple identical PLC, so it is not a loop. Thereby, the said connection path P2g-1 is output as an optimum connection path. Here, the connection path
(1/1)+(1/10)+(1/1)+(1/10)+(1/1)=3.2,(1/1) + (1/10) + (1/1) + (1/10) + (1/1) = 3.2,
所以在输出时输入该吞吐量值。其结果在图37-5中示出。然后,根据图12所示的限制,确认是否可以针对与PLC 10-2连接的网络继续进行信息收集。在这里,由于不符合限制,所以将PLC 10-2作为处理对象而执行图36-2的B1处理。So enter that throughput value on output. The result is shown in Figure 37-5. Then, according to the restrictions shown in FIG. 12, it is confirmed whether information collection can be continued for the network connected to PLC 10-2. Here, since the restriction is not met, the process B1 in Fig. 36-2 is executed with the PLC 10-2 as the process target.
(2-18)与PLC 10-2连接的网络(2-18) Network connected to PLC 10-2
在将PLC 10-2作为处理对象的B1处理中,收集PLC 10-2所连接的网络。具体地说,进行读出在图11的脱机网络结构信息中的连接网络信息P2n中储存的网络的处理。在这里,作为与PLC 10-2连接的网络,收集控制器间网络No.2及信息系统网络No.3。然后,生成连接至收集到的网络为止的连接通路,对该连接通路是否为环路进行确认。此外,在该网络处理中不存在优先度,顺次进行处理。In the B1 process in which the PLC 10-2 is the processing target, the network to which the PLC 10-2 is connected is collected. Specifically, a process of reading out the network stored in the connected network information P2n in the offline network configuration information in FIG. 11 is performed. Here, the inter-controller network No. 2 and the information system network No. 3 are collected as networks connected to the PLC 10-2. Then, a connection path leading to the collected network is generated, and it is checked whether or not the connection path is a loop. In addition, there is no priority in this network processing, and processing is performed sequentially.
(2-19)PLC 10-2→控制器间网络No.2(2-19) PLC 10-2→Network between controllers No.2
由于连接至控制器间网络No.2为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-2→控制器间网络No.2”,出现多个相同的网络,所以为环路。由此,不执行图36-3的B2处理。Since the connection route up to the inter-controller network No. 2 is "PLC 10-3 → inter-controller network No. 1 → PLC 10-1 → inter-controller network No. 2 → PLC 10-2 → inter-controller Network No.2", there are multiple identical networks, so it is a loop. Therefore, the B2 process of FIG. 36-3 is not performed.
(2-20)PLC 10-2→信息系统网络No.3(2-20) PLC 10-2→Information System Network No.3
由于连接至信息系统网络No.3为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-2→信息系统网络No.3”,没有出现多个相同的要素,所以并非环路。由此,根据图12所示的限制,确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。在这里,由于不符合限制,所以将信息系统网络No.3选择作为处理对象,执行图36-3的B2处理。Since the connection path up to the information system network No.3 is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-1→Inter-controller network No.2→PLC 10-2→Information system network No. .3", there are no multiple identical elements, so it is not a loop. Thereby, it is checked whether or not information collection can be continued on the network according to the restrictions shown in FIG. 12 . Here, since it does not comply with the restriction, the information system network No. 3 is selected as the processing object, and the B2 process in Fig. 36-3 is executed.
(2-21)与信息系统网络No.3连接的PLC(2-21) PLC connected to information system network No.3
在将信息系统网络No.3作为处理对象的B2处理中,收集与信息系统网络No.3连接的PLC。具体地说,在图11的脱机网络结构信息中储存的网络数据E3中,检索并提取与信息系统网络No.3连接的PLC。在这里,作为与信息系统网络No.3连接的PLC,收集PLC10-1、10-2。然后,生成连接至收集到的PLC为止的连接通路,对连接至各个PLC的连接通路是否为环路进行确认。此外,在该PLC处理中不存在优先度,顺次进行处理。In the B2 process which makes the information system network No. 3 the processing object, the PLC connected to the information system network No. 3 is collected. Specifically, in the network data E3 stored in the offline network configuration information of FIG. 11, the PLC connected to the information system network No. 3 is searched and extracted. Here, PLC10-1 and 10-2 are collected as PLC connected to information system network No. 3. Then, a connection path to the collected PLCs is generated, and it is checked whether or not the connection path to each PLC is a loop. In addition, there is no priority in this PLC process, and processes are performed sequentially.
(2-22)信息系统网络No.3→PLC 10-1(2-22) Information system network No.3→PLC 10-1
由于连接至PLC 10-1为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-2→信息系统网络No.3→PLC 10-1”,出现多个相同的PLC,所以为环路。由此,不输出该连接通路。Since the connection path up to PLC 10-1 is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-1→Controller inter-network No.2→PLC 10-2→Information system network No.3 →PLC 10-1", there are multiple identical PLCs, so it is a loop. Therefore, the connection path is not output.
(2-23)信息系统网络No.3→PLC 10-2(2-23) Information system network No.3→PLC 10-2
由于连接至PLC 10-2为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-2→信息系统网络No.3→PLC 10-2”,出现多个相同的PLC,所以为环路。由此,不输出该连接通路。由此,(2-20)的将信息系统网络No.3作为处理对象的B2处理完成。另外,(2-17)的将PLC 10-2作为处理对象的B1处理完成。Since the connection path up to PLC 10-2 is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-1→Inter-controller network No.2→PLC 10-2→Information system network No.3 →PLC 10-2", there are multiple identical PLCs, so it is a loop. Therefore, the connection path is not output. Thereby, the B2 process which made the information system network No. 3 of (2-20) the process object completes. In addition, the B1 processing of (2-17) with PLC 10-2 as the processing target is completed.
(2-24)控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-1(2-24) Network between controllers No.2→PLC 10-1
由于连接至PLC 10-1为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-1”,出现多个相同的PLC,所以为环路。由此,不执行图36-2所示的B1处理。Since the connection path up to PLC 10-1 is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-1→Inter-controller network No.2→PLC 10-1", multiple identical PLC, so it is a loop. Thus, the B1 process shown in FIG. 36-2 is not executed.
(2-25)控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-5(2-25) Network between controllers No.2→PLC 10-5
由于连接至PLC 10-5为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-5”,没有出现多个相同要素,所以并非环路。在这里,连接通路解析选择部123对该连接通路的吞吐量进行计算。如果参照图38,则连接至PLC10-5为止的吞吐量评价值为Since the connection path up to PLC 10-5 is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-1→Inter-controller network No.2→PLC 10-5", there are no multiple identical elements, so it is not a loop. Here, the connection path
(1/1)+(1/10)+(1/1)+(1/10)+(1/1)=3.2。(1/1) + (1/10) + (1/1) + (1/10) + (1/1) = 3.2.
但是,针对连接至PLC 10-5为止的通路,如图37-3所示已经输出了连接通路P5g-1。由于该连接通路P5g-1的吞吐量值为13.1,所以本次计算出的连接通路的吞吐量值较好。由此,替代已经输出的连接通路,而将吞吐量较好的本次计算出的连接通路作为最佳连接通路P5g进行输出。其结果在图37-3中示出。在该图37-3中,在连接通路P37-3的数据内容上添加删除线是表示进行删除,改写为其下方的数据。然后,根据图12所示的限制,确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。在这里,由于不符合限制,所以将PLC10-5作为处理对象而执行图36-2的B1处理。However, for the path connected to PLC 10-5, the connection path P5g-1 is already output as shown in Fig. 37-3. Since the throughput value of the connection path P5g-1 is 13.1, the throughput value of the connection path calculated this time is better. In this way, instead of the already output connection path, the connection path calculated this time with better throughput is output as the optimal connection path P5g. The result is shown in Figure 37-3. In this FIG. 37-3 , adding a strikethrough to the data content of the connection path P37 - 3 means to delete and rewrite the data below it. Then, according to the restrictions shown in Figure 12, check whether information collection can continue for the network. Here, since it does not comply with a restriction, B1 process of FIG. 36-2 is performed making PLC10-5 a process object.
(2-26)与PLC 10-5连接的网络(2-26) Network connected with PLC 10-5
在将PLC 10-5作为处理对象的B1处理中,收集PLC 10-5所连接的网络。具体地说,进行读出在图11的脱机网络结构信息中的连接网络信息P5n中储存的网络的处理。在这里,作为与PLC 10-5连接的网络,收集现场网络和控制器间网络No.2。然后,生成连接至收集到的网络为止的连接通路,对各个连接通路是否为环路进行确认。此外,在该网络处理中不存在优先度,顺次进行处理。In the B1 process in which the PLC 10-5 is the processing target, the network to which the PLC 10-5 is connected is collected. Specifically, a process of reading out the network stored in the connected network information P5n in the offline network configuration information in FIG. 11 is performed. Here, as a network connected to PLC 10-5, field network and inter-controller network No. 2 are collected. Then, connection paths leading to the collected networks are generated, and whether or not each connection path is a loop is checked. In addition, there is no priority in this network processing, and processing is performed sequentially.
(2-27)PLC 10-5→现场网络(2-27) PLC 10-5 → field network
由于连接至现场网络为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-5→现场网络”,没有出现多个相同的要素,所以并非环路。由此,根据图12所示的限制,确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。在这里,由于不符合限制,所以将现场网络选择作为处理对象,执行图36-3的B2处理。Since the connection path up to the field network is "PLC 10-3 → inter-controller network No. 1 → PLC 10-1 → inter-controller network No. 2 → PLC 10-5 → field network", multiple The same elements, so not a loop. Thereby, it is checked whether or not information collection can be continued on the network according to the restrictions shown in FIG. 12 . Here, since the restriction is not met, the field network selection is set as the processing object, and the B2 processing in Fig. 36-3 is executed.
(2-28)与现场网络连接的PLC(2-28) PLC connected to the field network
在将现场网络作为处理对象的B2处理中,收集与现场网络连接的PLC信息。具体地说,在图11的脱机网络结构信息的网络数据C中,检索并提取与现场网络连接的PLC。在这里,作为与现场网络连接的PLC,收集PLC 10-4、10-5。然后,生成连接至收集到的PLC为止的连接通路,对连接至各个PLC的连接通路是否为环路进行确认。在该PLC处理中不存在优先度,顺次进行处理。In the B2 process which makes the on-site network the processing target, PLC information connected to the on-site network is collected. Specifically, in the network data C of the off-line network configuration information in FIG. 11, PLCs connected to the on-site network are retrieved and extracted. Here, PLCs 10-4 and 10-5 are collected as PLCs connected to the field network. Then, a connection path to the collected PLCs is generated, and it is checked whether or not the connection path to each PLC is a loop. There is no priority in this PLC processing, and processing is performed sequentially.
(2-29)现场网络→PLC 10-4(2-29) Field network → PLC 10-4
由于连接至PLC 10-4为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-5→现场网络→PLC 10-4”,没有出现多个相同要素,所以并非环路。在这里,连接通路解析选择部123对该连接通路的吞吐量进行计算。如果参照图38,则连接至PLC 10-4为止的吞吐量评价值为Since the connection path up to PLC 10-4 is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-1→Inter-controller network No.2→PLC 10-5→Field network→PLC 10- 4", there are no multiple identical elements, so it is not a loop. Here, the connection path
(1/1)+(1/10)+(1/1)+(1/10)+(1/1)+(1/0.1)+(1/1)=14.2。(1/1) + (1/10) + (1/1) + (1/10) + (1/1) + (1/0.1) + (1/1) = 14.2.
但是,针对连接至PLC 10-4为止的通路,如图37-2所示已经输出了连接通路P4g。由于该连接通路P4g的吞吐量值为2.1,所以与本次计算出的连接通路相比,现有的连接通路的吞吐量值较好。由此,将吞吐量较好的已被输出的连接通路作为最佳连接通路(图37-2)。However, for the path connected to PLC 10-4, the connection path P4g is already output as shown in Fig. 37-2. Since the throughput value of the connection path P4g is 2.1, the throughput value of the existing connection path is better than the connection path calculated this time. Thus, the output connection path with better throughput is taken as the optimal connection path (Fig. 37-2).
(2-30)现场网络→PLC 10-5(2-30) Field network → PLC 10-5
由于连接至PLC 10-5为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-5→现场网络→PLC 10-5”,出现多个相同的PLC,所以为环路。由此,不输出连接通路。由此,(2-28)的将现场网络作为处理对象的B2处理完成。Since the connection path up to PLC 10-5 is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-1→Inter-controller network No.2→PLC 10-5→Field network→PLC 10- 5", there are multiple identical PLCs, so it is a loop. Thus, the connection path is not output. Thereby, the B2 process of (2-28) which makes an on-site network the processing target is completed.
(2-31)PLC 10-5→控制器间网络No.2(2-31) PLC 10-5→Network between controllers No.2
由于连接至控制器间网络No.2为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-5→控制器间网络No.2”,出现多个相同的网络,所以为环路。由此,不执行图36-3的B2处理。由此,(2-26)的将PLC 10-5作为处理对象的B1处理完成。另外,(2-16)的将控制器间网络No.2作为处理对象的图36-3的B2处理完成。Since the connection route to the inter-controller network No. 2 is "PLC 10-3 → inter-controller network No. 1 → PLC 10-1 → inter-controller network No. 2 → PLC 10-5 → inter-controller Network No.2", there are multiple identical networks, so it is a loop. Therefore, the B2 process of FIG. 36-3 is not performed. As a result, the B1 processing of (2-26) which targets PLC 10-5 is completed. In addition, the B2 process of FIG. 36-3 which made the inter-controller network No. 2 of (2-16) the processing target is completed.
(2-32)与信息系统网络No.3连接的PLC(2-32) PLC connected to information system network No.3
由于连接至在(2-13)中作为与PLC 10-1连接的网络之一而收集的信息系统网络No.3为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→信息系统网络No.3”,没有出现多个相同要素,所以并非环路。由此,根据图12所示的限制,确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。在这里,由于不符合限制,所以可以对网络继续进行信息收集,将信息系统网络No.3选择作为处理对象,执行图36-3的B2处理。The connection path up to the information system network No. 3 collected as one of the networks connected to PLC 10-1 in (2-13) is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-1→Information system network No.3", there are no multiple identical elements, so it is not a loop. Thereby, it is checked whether or not information collection can be continued on the network according to the restrictions shown in FIG. 12 . Here, since the restriction is not met, the network can continue to collect information, select the information system network No. 3 as the processing object, and execute the B2 processing in Figure 36-3.
在将信息系统网络No.3作为处理对象的B2处理中,收集与信息系统网络No.3连接的PLC。具体地说,从图11的脱机网络结构信息中储存的网络数据E3中,检索并提取与信息系统网络No.3连接的PLC。在这里,作为与信息系统网络No.3连接的PLC,收集PLC10-1、10-2。然后,生成连接至收集到的PLC为止的连接通路,对连接至各个PLC的连接通路是否为环路进行确认。在该PLC处理中不存在优先度,顺次进行处理。In the B2 process which makes the information system network No. 3 the processing object, the PLC connected to the information system network No. 3 is collected. Specifically, from the network data E3 stored in the offline network configuration information of FIG. 11, the PLC connected to the information system network No. 3 is retrieved and extracted. Here, PLC10-1 and 10-2 are collected as PLC connected to information system network No. 3. Then, a connection path to the collected PLCs is generated, and it is checked whether or not the connection path to each PLC is a loop. There is no priority in this PLC processing, and processing is performed sequentially.
(2-33)信息系统网络No.3→PLC 10-1(2-33) Information system network No.3→PLC 10-1
由于连接至PLC 10-1为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→信息系统网络No.3→PLC 10-1”,出现多个相同的PLC,所以为环路。由此,不输出该连接通路。Since the connection path up to PLC 10-1 is "PLC 10-3 → inter-controller network No. 1 → PLC 10-1 → information system network No. 3 → PLC 10-1", multiple identical PLCs appear , so it is a loop. Therefore, the connection path is not output.
(2-34)信息系统网络No.3→PLC 10-2(2-34) Information system network No.3→PLC 10-2
由于连接至PLC 10-2为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→信息系统网络No.3→PLC 10-2”,没有出现多个相同的要素,所以并非环路。在这里,连接通路解析选择部123对该连接通路的吞吐量进行计算。如果参照图38,则连接至PLC10-2为止的吞吐量评价值为Since the connection path up to PLC 10-2 is "PLC 10-3→inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-1→information system network No.3→PLC 10-2", there are no multiple identical elements, so it is not a loop. Here, the connection path
(1/1)+(1/10)+(1/1)+(1/100)+(1/1)=3.11。(1/1) + (1/10) + (1/1) + (1/100) + (1/1) = 3.11.
但是,针对连接至PLC 10-2为止的通路,如图37-5所示已经输出了连接通路P2g-1。由于该连接通路P2g-1的吞吐量值为3.2,所以本次计算出的连接通路的吞吐量值较好。由此,替代已输出的连接通路P2g-1,将吞吐量较好的本次计算出的连接通路作为最佳连接通路P2g进行输出。其结果在图37-5中示出。然后,根据图12所示的限制,确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。在这里,由于不符合限制,所以将PLC 10-2作为处理对象而执行图36-2的B1处理。However, for the path connected to PLC 10-2, the connection path P2g-1 is already output as shown in Fig. 37-5. Since the throughput value of the connection path P2g-1 is 3.2, the throughput value of the connection path calculated this time is better. As a result, instead of the already output connection path P2g-1, the connection path calculated this time with better throughput is output as the optimum connection path P2g. The result is shown in Figure 37-5. Then, according to the restrictions shown in Figure 12, check whether information collection can continue for the network. Here, since the restriction is not met, the process B1 in Fig. 36-2 is executed with the PLC 10-2 as the process target.
(2-35)与PLC 10-2连接的网络(2-35) Network connected to PLC 10-2
在将PLC 10-2作为处理对象的B1处理中,收集PLC 10-2所连接的网络。具体地说,进行读出在图11的脱机网络结构信息中的连接网络信息P2n中储存的网络的处理。在这里,作为与PLC 10-2连接的网络,收集控制器间网络No.2和信息系统网络No.3。然后,生成连接至收集到的网络为止的连接通路,对各个连接通路是否为环路进行确认。此外,在该网络的处理中不存在优先度,顺次进行处理。In the B1 process in which the PLC 10-2 is the processing target, the network to which the PLC 10-2 is connected is collected. Specifically, a process of reading out the network stored in the connected network information P2n in the offline network configuration information in FIG. 11 is performed. Here, as the network connected to PLC 10-2, inter-controller network No. 2 and information system network No. 3 are collected. Then, connection paths leading to the collected networks are generated, and whether or not each connection path is a loop is checked. In addition, there is no priority in the processing of this network, and processing is performed sequentially.
(2-36)PLC 10-2→控制器间网络No.2(2-36) PLC 10-2→Network between controllers No.2
由于连接至控制器间网络No.2为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→信息系统网络No.3→PLC 10-2→控制器间网络No.2”,没有出现多个相同的要素,所以并非环路。由此,根据图12所示的限制,确认是否可以针对网络继续进行信息收集。在这里,由于不符合限制,所以将控制器间网络No.2选择作为处理对象,执行图36-3的B2处理。Since the connection route up to the inter-controller network No. 2 is "PLC 10-3 → inter-controller network No. 1 → PLC 10-1 → information system network No. 3 → PLC 10-2 → inter-controller network No.2", there are no multiple identical elements, so it is not a loop. Thereby, it is checked whether or not information collection can be continued on the network according to the restrictions shown in FIG. 12 . Here, since the restriction is not met, inter-controller network No. 2 is selected as the processing object, and B2 processing in FIG. 36-3 is executed.
(2-37)与控制器间网络No.2连接的PLC(2-37) PLC connected to the network No.2 between controllers
在将控制器间网络No.2作为处理对象的B2处理中,收集与控制器间网络No.2连接的PLC信息。具体地说,在图11的脱机网络结构信息中储存的网络数据M2中,检索并提取与控制器间网络No.2连接的PLC。在这里,作为与控制器间网络No.2连接的PLC,收集PLC 10-2、10-1、10-5。然后,生成连接至收集到的PLC为止的连接通路,对连接至各个PLC的连接通路是否为环路进行确认。在该PLC处理中不存在优先度,顺次进行处理。In the B2 process which makes the inter-controller network No. 2 the processing object, PLC information connected to the inter-controller network No. 2 is collected. Specifically, the PLC connected to the inter-controller network No. 2 is searched and extracted from the network data M2 stored in the offline network configuration information of FIG. 11 . Here, PLCs 10-2, 10-1, and 10-5 are collected as PLCs connected to the inter-controller network No. 2. Then, a connection path to the collected PLCs is generated, and it is checked whether or not the connection path to each PLC is a loop. There is no priority in this PLC processing, and processing is performed sequentially.
(2-38)控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-2(2-38) Network between controllers No.2→PLC 10-2
由于连接至PLC 10-2为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→信息系统网络No.3→PLC 10-2→控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-2”,出现多个相同的PLC,所以为环路。由此,不输出连接通路。Since the connection path up to PLC 10-2 is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-1→Information system network No.3→PLC 10-2→Inter-controller network No.2 →PLC 10-2", there are multiple identical PLCs, so it is a loop. Thus, the connection path is not output.
(2-39)控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-1(2-39) Network between controllers No.2→PLC 10-1
由于连接至PLC 10-1为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→信息系统网络No.3→PLC 10-2→控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-1”,出现多个相同的PLC,所以为环路。由此,不输出连接通路。Since the connection path up to PLC 10-1 is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-1→Information system network No.3→PLC 10-2→Inter-controller network No.2 →PLC 10-1", there are multiple identical PLCs, so it is a loop. Thus, the connection path is not output.
(2-40)控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-5(2-40) Network between controllers No.2→PLC 10-5
由于连接至PLC 10-5为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→信息系统网络No.3→PLC 10-2→控制器间网络No.2→PLC 10-5”,没有出现多个相同要素,所以并非环路。在这里,连接通路解析选择部123对该连接通路的吞吐量进行计算。如果参照图38,则连接至PLC 10-5为止的吞吐量评价值为Since the connection path up to PLC 10-5 is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-1→Information system network No.3→PLC 10-2→Inter-controller network No.2 →PLC 10-5", there are no multiple identical elements, so it is not a loop. Here, the connection path
(1/1)+(1/10)+(1/1)+(1/100)+(1/1)+(1/10)+(1/1)=4.21。(1/1) + (1/10) + (1/1) + (1/100) + (1/1) + (1/10) + (1/1) = 4.21.
但是,针对连接至PLC 10-5为止的通路,如图37-3所示已经输出了连接通路P5g。由于该连接通路P5g的吞吐量值为3.2,所以现有的连接通路与本次计算出的相比吞吐量值较好。由此,将吞吐量较好的已输出的连接通路作为最佳连接通路(图37-3)。由此,(2-37)的将控制器间网络No.2作为处理对象的B2处理完成。However, for the path connected to PLC 10-5, the connection path P5g is already output as shown in Fig. 37-3. Since the throughput value of the connection path P5g is 3.2, the throughput value of the existing connection path is better than that calculated this time. Therefore, the output connection path with better throughput is taken as the optimal connection path (Figure 37-3). Thereby, the B2 process of (2-37) which made the inter-controller network No. 2 the processing target is completed.
(2-41)与信息系统网络No.3连接的PLC(2-41) PLC connected to information system network No.3
由于连接至在(2-35)中作为与PLC 10-2连接的网络之一而收集的信息系统网络No.3为止的连接通路为“PLC 10-3→控制器间网络No.1→PLC 10-1→信息系统网络No.3→PLC 10-2→信息系统网络No.3”,出现多个相同的网络,所以为环路。由此,不执行图36-3的B2处理。由此,(2-35)的将PLC 10-2作为处理对象的图36-2的B1处理完成。另外,(2-32)的将信息系统网络No.3作为处理对象的B2处理完成。此外,(2-13)的将PLC 10-1作为处理对象的B1处理完成。另外,(2-11)的将控制器间网络No.1作为处理对象的B2处理完成。此外,(2-2)的将PLC 10-3作为处理对象的B1处理完成。由此,连接通路解析处理完成。The connection route up to the information system network No. 3 collected as one of the networks connected to PLC 10-2 in (2-35) is "PLC 10-3→Inter-controller network No.1→PLC 10-1→Information system network No.3→PLC 10-2→Information system network No.3", there are multiple identical networks, so it is a loop. Therefore, the B2 process of FIG. 36-3 is not performed. As a result, the processing of B1 in FIG. 36-2 in (2-35) that targets PLC 10-2 is completed. In addition, the B2 process of (2-32) which made the information system network No. 3 the process object completed. In addition, the B1 process of (2-13) which made PLC 10-1 the process target is completed. In addition, the B2 process of (2-11) which made the inter-controller network No. 1 the processing target is completed. In addition, the B1 process of (2-2) which made PLC 10-3 the process target is completed. Thus, the connection path analysis processing is completed.
(连接通路显示处理)(Connection path display processing)
如果通过上述脱机连接通路解析处理,在脱机连接通路保持部125中储存如图37-1~图37-5所示的连接通路,则连接通路显示部120按照该连接通路,在显示部112上突出显示连接通路。37-1 to 37-5 are stored in the offline connection
图39是表示脱机连接通路的显示画面的一个例子的图。如该图所示,容易把握连接至各个PLC的连接通路。在这里,如上所述,选择通信吞吐量较好的通路。FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of an offline connection path. As shown in this figure, it is easy to grasp the connection path to each PLC. Here, as described above, a path with better communication throughput is selected.
另外,也可以将可以访问的PLC和不可以访问的PLC突出地区别显示。通过如此进行显示,可以容易地理解从起点PLC可以访问的PLC(可以容易地理解不可访问的PLC)。In addition, it is also possible to prominently display accessible PLCs and inaccessible PLCs. By displaying in this way, it is possible to easily understand the PLCs accessible from the origin PLC (the inaccessible PLCs can be easily understood).
图40是表示脱机连接通路的显示画面的一个例子的图。在本图中,对于从起点PLC根据图12的限制而可以访问的PLC,在其附近设置“○”标示,对于从起点PLC根据图12的限制无法访问的PLC,在其附近设置“×”标示。由此,可以立刻识别出从起点PLC可以访问的PLC和不可访问的PLC。在该图40的例子中,在PLC 10-5的前端经由信息系统网络No.4连接有PLC 10-9。但是,由于对于该PLC 10-9,只有经由作为现场网络的本地站点的PLC 10-5才可以访问,所以符合图12的限制B。由此,无法访问PLC 10-9。FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of an offline connection path. In this figure, for the PLCs that can be accessed from the starting point PLC according to the restrictions in Fig. 12, "○" marks are set around them, and for the PLCs that cannot be accessed from the starting point PLC according to the restrictions in Fig. 12, "×" is set near them marked. Thereby, it is possible to immediately recognize PLCs accessible from the origin PLC and PLCs inaccessible. In the example shown in FIG. 40, PLC 10-9 is connected to the front end of PLC 10-5 via information system network No. 4. However, since this PLC 10-9 can only be accessed via the PLC 10-5 which is the local station of the field network, it complies with the restriction B of FIG. 12 . Therefore, PLC 10-9 cannot be accessed.
根据本实施方式4,具有下述效果,即,在脱机状态下生成的控制系统的网络图中,可以容易地把握从作为起点的PLC可以访问的PLC,并且可以事先了解在该情况下连接至各个PLC的连接通路。另外,也具有以下效果,即,在存在多个从起点PLC开始的连接通路的情况下,自动地选择根据规定的基准而选择的最佳连接通路。According to the fourth embodiment, there is an effect that in the network diagram of the control system generated offline, it is possible to easily grasp the PLCs that can be accessed from the starting point PLC, and it is possible to know in advance the connection status in this case. Connection path to each PLC. In addition, there is also an effect that, when there are a plurality of connection paths from the starting point PLC, an optimal connection path selected based on a predetermined criterion is automatically selected.
实施方式5
但是,对于构成控制系统的网络,由于存在上述的图12那样的连接限制,所以并非是该控制系统设计装置无论与哪里连接都可以访问系统内的所有PLC。由此,在存在无法访问的PLC的情况下,需要进行下述作业,即,暂时将控制系统设计装置和PLC之间的连接线缆取下,重新与作为对象的PLC连接。另外,根据控制系统设计装置所连结的位置不同,有可能使通信速度变慢。However, since the network constituting the control system has connection restrictions as shown in FIG. 12 described above, the control system design device cannot access all PLCs in the system no matter where it is connected. Therefore, when there is a PLC that cannot be accessed, it is necessary to temporarily disconnect the connection cable between the control system design device and the PLC, and reconnect to the target PLC. In addition, depending on the location where the control system design device is connected, the communication speed may be slowed down.
由此,在本实施方式5中,针对下述控制系统设计装置及控制系统设计方法进行了说明,即,对于在实施方式4中构成控制系统的网络,可以自动地计算出作为控制系统设计装置的连接口的PLC(起点PLC),其可以与所有PLC连接,并且可以进行高速通信(成为在综合角度上吞吐量最佳的通路)。Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the control system design device and control system design method that can automatically calculate the control system design device that can automatically calculate The PLC (starting point PLC) of the connection port can be connected to all PLCs and can perform high-speed communication (becoming the best path for throughput in terms of comprehensiveness).
图41是示意地表示本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置的实施方式5的功能结构的框图。该控制系统设计装置100的特征在于,在实施方式4的图35的基础上,删除起点PLC指定部113,并具有最佳连接通路计算部126。FIG. 41 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional configuration of
最佳连接通路计算部126具有下述功能,即,针对该控制系统设计装置100的连接口(起点PLC)的所有候补,顺次通过连接通路解析选择部123进行连接通路解析选择处理,随后仅提取可以对所有PLC进行连接的候补,进而在其中提取出至各个PLC的通信吞吐量综合上较好的连接通路,作为最佳连接通路。该最佳连接通路计算部126对应于权利要求书中的最佳连接通路计算单元。The optimal connection
接着,针对具有该实施方式5的结构的控制系统设计装置的处理进行说明。图42是表示最佳连接通路计算处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。另外,在这里,例举在具有图1的结构的控制系统中的最佳连接通路计算处理进行说明。首先,最佳连接通路计算部126提取作为起点PLC的候补PLC(步骤S371)。具体地说,提取图11的脱机网络结构信息中储存的所有PLC。在这里,提取PLC 10-1~10-5这5个PLC。Next, the processing of the control system design device having the configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described. Fig. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of an optimal connection path calculation processing procedure. In addition, here, the optimal connection route calculation process in the control system which has the structure of FIG. 1 is demonstrated as an example. First, the optimal connection
接着,将被提取的各个PLC分别作为起点PLC而执行图36-1~图36-3所示的脱机连接通路解析处理(步骤S372)。将PLC 10-3作为起点PLC而执行脱机连接通路解析处理后,作为结果得到的连接通路数据,与实施方式4的图37-1~图37-5所示的结果相同。图43-1~图43-5是表示将PLC 10-1作为起点PLC而进行连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图,图44-1~图44-5是表示将PLC 10-2作为起点PLC而进行连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图,图45-1~图45-5是表示将PLC 10-4作为起点PLC而进行连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图,图46-1~图46-5是表示将PLC 10-5作为起点PLC而进行连接通路解析处理的情况下的连接通路数据的图。Next, the offline connection path analysis processing shown in FIGS. 36-1 to 36-3 is executed with each of the extracted PLCs as the origin PLC (step S372 ). The connection path data obtained as a result of executing the off-line connection path analysis process with the PLC 10-3 as the starting point PLC is the same as the results shown in FIGS. 37-1 to 37-5 of the fourth embodiment. Fig. 43-1 to Fig. 43-5 are diagrams showing connection path data in the case of performing connection path analysis processing with PLC 10-1 as the starting point PLC, and Fig. 44-1 to Fig. 44-5 are diagrams showing that PLC 10- 2 Diagrams of the connection path data when the connection path analysis process is performed as the starting point PLC, and Figs. 46-1 to 46-5 are diagrams showing connection path data in the case of performing connection path analysis processing with the PLC 10-5 as the starting point PLC.
然后,针对执行连接通路解析处理而获得的各自的结果,对是否可以与所有PLC连接进行确认(步骤S373)。在这里,由于随着作为起点的PLC的选择方法的不同,有时根据图12的限制而产生存在无法连接的PLC的情况,所以对是否与图12的限制相抵触进行确认。在这里,在将任意一个PLC作为起点PLC的情况下,都可以与所有PLC连接。Then, it is checked whether or not all PLCs can be connected to each of the results obtained by executing the connection path analysis process (step S373 ). Here, depending on the selection method of the starting point PLC, there may be PLCs that cannot be connected due to the restrictions in FIG. 12 . Therefore, it is checked whether or not it conflicts with the restrictions in FIG. 12 . Here, if any one PLC is used as the start PLC, it can be connected to all PLCs.
然后,针对执行连接通路解析处理后获得的各自的结果,对系统结构整体的吞吐量评价值(合计吞吐量评价值)进行比较(步骤S374)。在这里使用的吞吐量模型与在实施方式4中使用的图38的吞吐量模型相同。下面,示出将各个PLC作为起点的情况下的吞吐量评价值和其合计值。Then, the throughput evaluation values (total throughput evaluation values) of the entire system configuration are compared with each of the results obtained after executing the connection path analysis processing (step S374 ). The throughput model used here is the same as the throughput model shown in FIG. 38 used in the fourth embodiment. Next, throughput evaluation values and their total values when each PLC is used as a starting point are shown.
(将PLC 10-1作为起点PLC的情况下)(When using PLC 10-1 as the starting point PLC)
PLC 10-1(P1g1)=0PLC 10-1 (P1g1)=0
PLC 10-2(P2g1)=2.01PLC 10-2 (P2g1) = 2.01
PLC 10-3(P3g1)=2.1PLC 10-3 (P3g1) = 2.1
PLC 10-4(P4g1)=2.1PLC 10-4 (P4g1) = 2.1
PLC 10-5(P5g1)=2.1PLC 10-5 (P5g1) = 2.1
合计吞吐量评价值=8.31Total throughput evaluation value = 8.31
(将PLC 10-2作为起点PLC的情况下)(When using PLC 10-2 as the starting point PLC)
PLC 10-1(P1g2)=2.01PLC 10-1 (P1g2) = 2.01
PLC 10-2(P2g2)=0PLC 10-2 (P2g2)=0
PLC 10-3(P3g2)=3.2PLC 10-3 (P3g2) = 3.2
PLC 10-4(P4g2)=3.2PLC 10-4 (P4g2) = 3.2
PLC 10-5(P5g2)=2.1PLC 10-5 (P5g2) = 2.1
合计吞吐量评价值=10.51Total throughput evaluation value = 10.51
(将PLC 10-3作为起点PLC的情况下)(When using PLC 10-3 as the starting point PLC)
PLC 10-1(P1g)=2.1PLC 10-1 (P1g) = 2.1
PLC 10-2(P2g)=3.11PLC 10-2 (P2g) = 3.11
PLC 10-3(P3g)=0PLC 10-3 (P3g) = 0
PLC 10-4(P4g)=2.1PLC 10-4 (P4g) = 2.1
PLC 10-5(P5g)=3.2PLC 10-5 (P5g) = 3.2
合计吞吐量评价值=10.51Total throughput evaluation value = 10.51
(将PLC 10-4作为起点PLC的情况下)(When using PLC 10-4 as the starting point PLC)
PLC 10-1(P1g4)=2.1PLC 10-1 (P1g4) = 2.1
PLC 10-2(P2g4)=3.11PLC 10-2 (P2g4) = 3.11
PLC 10-3(P3g4)=2.1PLC 10-3 (P3g4) = 2.1
PLC 10-4(P4g4)=0PLC 10-4 (P4g4) = 0
PLC 10-5(P5g4)=3.2PLC 10-5 (P5g4) = 3.2
合计吞吐量评价值=10.51Total throughput evaluation value = 10.51
(将PLC 10-5作为起点PLC的情况下)(When using PLC 10-5 as the starting point PLC)
PLC 10-1(P1g5)=2.1PLC 10-1 (P1g5) = 2.1
PLC 10-2(P2g5)=2.1PLC 10-2 (P2g5) = 2.1
PLC 10-3(P3g5)=3.2PLC 10-3 (P3g5) = 3.2
PLC 10-4(P4g5)=3.2PLC 10-4 (P4g5) = 3.2
PLC 10-5(P5g5)=0PLC 10-5 (P5g5)=0
合计吞吐量评价值=10.6Total throughput evaluation value = 10.6
然后,最佳连接通路计算部126从上述计算出的将各个PLC作为起点的合计吞吐量评价值中,提取系统结构整体的吞吐量最佳者(步骤S375),作为最佳连接通路向脱机连接通路保持部125输出(步骤S376)。由于利用在实施方式4中所使用的吞吐量模型,所以在这里,合计吞吐量评价值较小的连接通路最佳。根据上述结果,由于将PLC 10-1作为起点的情况下的连接通路数据的合计吞吐量评价值最小,所以将图43-1~图43-5所示的最佳连接通路作为最佳连接通路,向脱机连接通路保持部125输出。由此,最佳连接通路计算处理完成。Then, the optimal connection
然后,通过连接通路显示部120,基于由最佳连接通路计算部126计算出的最佳连接通路,将最佳连接通路显示在脱机系统结构图中。图47是表示最佳连接通路的显示画面的一个例子的图。该图基于图43-1所示的最佳连接通路,利用实施方式3的连接通路显示处理而显示连接通路。由此,控制系统设计装置100的使用者可以明白,只要在PLC 10-1上连接控制系统设计装置100,就可以与构成控制系统的所有PLC连接,可以以较高吞吐量进行数据传送。Then, the optimal connection path is displayed on the offline system configuration diagram by the connection
根据本实施方式5,对于在脱机状态下构筑的控制系统的网络,可以计算出能够对控制系统内的所有PLC进行访问、且能够进行高速通信的位置。其结果,具有以下效果,即,通过在该位置上连接控制系统设计装置100,就可以减少设定数据的下载和上传作业所需的时间。According to
实施方式6Embodiment 6
在本实施方式6中,针对下述控制系统设计装置和控制系统设计方法进行说明,即,对于从起点PLC至各个PLC的连接通路的中途的PLC,可以自动地计算用于将接收到的数据进行路由以到达作为目标的PLC的路由参数,并进行设定。在这里,首先对控制系统中的路由参数简单地进行说明,然后说明实施方式的内容。In Embodiment 6, a control system design device and a control system design method will be described, that is, for a PLC in the middle of the connection path from the starting point PLC to each PLC, the Perform routing to reach the routing parameters of the target PLC and set them. Here, first, the routing parameters in the control system will be briefly described, and then the contents of the embodiment will be described.
作为控制系统中的路由功能,是在由多个网络组成的系统中,将跨越多个网络的数据向其它网络序号的站点瞬时传送的功能。为了执行路由功能,需要设定路由参数,将请求目标的网络序号和实现桥接功能的PLC之间进行对应。As a routing function in the control system, in a system composed of multiple networks, it is a function to instantaneously transmit data across multiple networks to stations with serial numbers on other networks. In order to implement the routing function, it is necessary to set the routing parameters, and correspond between the network serial number of the request target and the PLC that realizes the bridging function.
另外,需要在瞬时传送的请求源和中继站点中设定路由参数。在这里,所谓中继站点是指与多个网络连接的PLC。另外,在中继站点中通常需要设定用于从请求源向请求目标发送(往程)的路由参数、和用于从请求目标向请求源发送(返程)的路由参数这2者。此外,无需在请求目标中设定路由参数。In addition, routing parameters need to be set in the request source and the relay station of the transient transmission. Here, the relay station refers to a PLC connected to a plurality of networks. In addition, it is usually necessary to set two routing parameters for sending from the request source to the request destination (outward trip) and routing parameters for sending from the request destination to the request source (return trip) at the relay site. Also, there is no need to set routing parameters in the request target.
图48是表示在控制系统中设定的路由参数的一个例子的图。此外,在该图48中,在表示各个PLC的矩形的框内示出通信单元。例如在网络No.1的站点1的情况下,将该通信单元的标示作为“1Ns1”。另外,在与多个网络连接的PLC中设置有多个网络单元。Fig. 48 is a diagram showing an example of routing parameters set in the control system. In addition, in this FIG. 48, the communication unit is shown in the rectangle box which shows each PLC. For example, in the case of
在该例子中,控制系统是将网络No.1~网络No.3这3个网络连接而构成的。在网络No.1中连接PLC 10-1~10-6这6个PLC,其中站点4的PLC 10-4与近邻的网络No.2也进行连接。即,PLC 10-4具有:通信单元1Ns4,其与网络No.1进行通信;以及通信单元2Ns1,其与网络No.2进行通信。另外,网络No.2与PLC 10-4、10-7、10-8、10-13这4个连接。其中,网络No.2中的站点1的PLC10-4与近邻的网络No.1也进行连接,站点4的PLC 10-13与近邻的网络No.3也进行连接。即,PLC 10-13具有:通信单元2Ns4,其与网络No.2进行通信;以及通信单元3Ns5,其与网络No.3进行通信。另外,在网络No.3中连接PLC 10-9~10-13这5个。其中,在网络No.3中的站点5的PLC 10-13与近邻的网络No.2也进行连接。In this example, the control system is configured by connecting three networks, network No. 1 to network No. 3. Six PLCs, PLCs 10-1 to 10-6, are connected to network No. 1, and PLC 10-4 at
在这里,例举从网络No.1的PLC 10-3向网络No.3的PLC 10-12瞬时传送数据的情况进行说明。在该情况下,需要在请求进行瞬时传送的网络No.1的PLC 10-3、实现网络No.1和网络No.2的桥接功能的PLC 10-4、以及实现网络No.2和网络No.3的桥接功能的PLC 10-13中设定路由参数。下面,对于各个站点的路由参数的设定进行说明。Here, a case where data is instantaneously transmitted from PLC 10-3 of network No. 1 to PLC 10-12 of network No. 3 will be described as an example. In this case, PLC 10-3 of network No. 1 that requests transient transmission, PLC 10-4 that realizes the bridging function between network No. 1 and network No. .3 Set the routing parameters in the PLC 10-13 of the bridging function. Next, the setting of routing parameters for each site will be described.
(1)网络No.1的PLC 10-3(1) PLC 10-3 of network No.1
在该PLC 10-3中,作为路由参数设定传送目标网络序号(3)及中继站点的通信单元(1Ns4)、连接至该中继站点的中继网络序号(1)。In this PLC 10-3, the transmission destination network number (3), the communication unit (1Ns4) of the relay station, and the relay network number (1) connected to the relay station are set as routing parameters.
(2)网络No.1的PLC 10-4(2) PLC 10-4 of network No.1
在该PLC 10-4中,作为路由参数设定传送目标网络序号(3)及中继站点的通信单元(2Ns4)、连接至该中继站点的中继网络序号(2)。此外,由于在下面说明的(3)的PLC 10-13中设定了用于从网络No.2向网络No.1进行数据传送的路由参数,所以在该PLC10-4中无需返程用的路由参数。In this PLC 10-4, the transmission destination network number (3), the communication unit (2Ns4) of the relay station, and the relay network number (2) connected to the relay station are set as routing parameters. In addition, since the routing parameters for data transmission from network No. 2 to network No. 1 are set in PLC 10-13 in (3) described below, no return routing is required in this PLC 10-4. parameter.
(3)网络No.2的PLC 10-13(3) PLC 10-13 of network No.2
在该PLC 10-13中,对于指向传送目标的设定,由于在本站点之后就到达传送目标网络No.3,所以无需设定往程用的路由参数。但是,作为返程用的路由参数,将传送目标网络序号设定为传送源网络序号(1),设定用于返程的中继站点的网络单元(2Ns1)以及连接至中继站点的中继网络序号(2)。In this PLC 10-13, for the setting of the transfer destination, since the transfer destination network No. 3 is reached after the own station, there is no need to set the routing parameters for the outbound route. However, as the routing parameter for the return trip, set the transfer destination network number as the transfer source network number (1), set the network unit (2Ns1) of the relay station used for the return trip, and the relay network number connected to the relay station ( 2).
通过如上所述在各个站点中设定路由参数,可以从网络No.1的PLC 10-3向网络No.3的PLC 10-12传送数据。By setting routing parameters in each station as described above, data can be transmitted from PLC 10-3 of network No. 1 to PLC 10-12 of network No. 3.
下面,对利用了如上所述设定的路由参数进行数据传送的步骤进行简单说明。首先,网络No.1的PLC 10-3基于路由参数,发送向网络No.3的PLC 10-13发送的数据。即,按照传送目标网络序号为“3”,中继目标网络为“1”,中继目标站点序号为“4”这样的设定参数,发送数据。由此,来自PLC 10-3的数据经由网络No.1向PLC 10-4(具有网络No.1中作为站点4的通信单元1Ns4的PLC)发送。Next, the procedure for data transmission using the routing parameters set as described above will be briefly described. First, the PLC 10-3 of the network No. 1 transmits the data to be transmitted to the PLC 10-13 of the network No. 3 based on the routing parameter. That is, the data is transmitted according to setting parameters such that the transfer destination network number is "3", the relay destination network is "1", and the relay destination station number is "4". Thus, data from PLC 10-3 is transmitted to PLC 10-4 (PLC having communication unit 1Ns4 as
如果该PLC 10-4的通信单元1Ns4接收到数据,则由于发送目标为网络No.3的PLC 10-12,所以参照路由参数,经由通信单元2Ns1和网络No.2,向中继目标网络No.2的中继目标站点序号4即PLC 10-13发送。在PLC 10-13中,由于接收到的数据是向网络No.3的PLC 10-12发送的数据,所以经由通信单元3Ns5和网络No.3向PLC 10-12发送。由此,往程的数据传送完成。If the communication unit 1Ns4 of the PLC 10-4 receives the data, since the transmission destination is the PLC 10-12 of the network No. 3, referring to the routing parameters, the data is transmitted to the relay destination network No. The
下面,说明作为请求目标的网络No.3的PLC 10-12向作为请求源的网络No.1的PLC 10-3传送数据的情况,即返程的数据传送的情况。在该情况下,网络No.3的PLC 10-12向传送目标即网络No.1的PLC 10-3发送数据。该数据经由网络No.3到达PLC 10-13。在PLC 10-13中,由于该数据的传送目标为传送目标网络No.1的PLC 10-3,所以参照路由参数,向中继目标网络为“网络No.2”、中继目标站点序号为“1”的网络No.2的PLC 10-4传送数据。Next, the case where the PLC 10-12 of the network No. 3 serving as the request destination transmits data to the PLC 10-3 of the network No. 1 serving as the request source, that is, the case of returning data will be described. In this case, the PLC 10-12 of the network No. 3 transmits data to the PLC 10-3 of the network No. 1 as the transfer destination. The data reaches PLC 10-13 via network No.3. In PLC 10-13, since the transfer destination of the data is PLC 10-3 of the transfer destination network No.1, referring to the routing parameters, the relay destination network is "network No. 2" and the relay destination station number is PLC 10-4 of network No. 2 of "1" transmits data.
由于在网络No.2的PLC 10-4中,接收到以网络No.1的PLC 10-3为传送目标的数据,所以经由安装在相同基板上的通信单元1Ns4和网络No.1,向传送目标即PLC 10-3发送。然后,PLC 10-3接收来自网络No.3的PLC 10-12的数据。由此,返程的数据传送完成。Since the PLC 10-4 of the network No. 2 receives the data whose transmission destination is the PLC 10-3 of the network No. 1, it transmits to the PLC 10-3 of the network No. 1 via the communication unit 1Ns4 mounted on the same board and the network No. 1. The target is sent by PLC 10-3. Then, PLC 10-3 receives data from PLC 10-12 of network No.3. Thus, the data transfer of the return trip is completed.
在如上所示的结构中,在控制系统中跨越多个网络的情况下进行数据传送。下面,针对上述控制系统中PLC的网络参数的设定处理进行说明。In the configuration shown above, data transmission is performed while straddling a plurality of networks in the control system. Next, the setting process of the network parameters of the PLC in the above-mentioned control system will be described.
图49是示意地表示本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置的实施方式6的功能结构的框图。该控制系统设计装置100在实施方式4的图35的基础上,还具有路由参数计算部127,其读出在脱机连接通路保持部125中保持的从起点PLC至各个PLC的连接通路,针对在各个连接通路中需要设定路由参数的PLC,计算路由参数。该路由参数计算部127对应于权利要求书中的路由参数计算单元。此外,对于与实施方式4的图35相同的结构要素,标注相同符号并省略其说明。FIG. 49 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional configuration of Embodiment 6 of the control system design device according to the present invention. In addition to FIG. 35 of
图50是示意地表示路由参数计算部的更加详细的功能结构的框图。如该图所示,路由参数计算部127具有连接通路反转功能模块1271、传送目标网络序号提取功能模块1272、中继目标网络序号提取功能模块1273、以及中继目标站点序号提取功能模块1274。FIG. 50 is a block diagram schematically showing a more detailed functional configuration of a routing parameter calculation unit. As shown in the figure, the routing
连接通路反转功能模块1271提取在脱机连接通路保持部125中储存的连接通路,生成使该数据逆序化而成的逆连接通路。The connection path
传送目标网络序号提取功能模块1272从储存在脱机连接通路保持部125中的连接通路、和由连接通路反转功能模块1271生成的逆连接通路中,提取路由参数中的传送目标网络序号。The transfer destination network number
中继目标网络序号提取部从储存在脱机连接通路保持部125中的连接通路、和由连接通路反转功能模块1271生成的逆连接通路中,提取路由参数中的中继目标网络序号。The relay destination network number extraction unit extracts the relay destination network number in the routing parameters from the connection path stored in the offline connection
中继目标站点序号提取部从储存在脱机连接通路保持部125中的连接通路、和由连接通路反转功能模块1271生成的逆连接通路中,提取路由参数中的中继目标站点序号。The relay destination station number extraction unit extracts the relay destination station number in the routing parameter from the connection path stored in the offline connection
(1)处理的概要(1) Outline of processing
下面,对于具有上述结构的控制系统设计装置100中的路由参数的计算处理进行说明。图51-1~图51-2是表示路由参数计算处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。首先,通过起点PLC指定部113由使用者指定瞬时传送的请求源PLC(步骤S411)。以下将该请求源PLC称为起点PLC。Next, calculation processing of routing parameters in the control
然后,将通过起点PLC指定部113指定的起点PLC选择作为处理对象,执行实施方式4的图36-2所示的B2处理(步骤S412),取得连接通路(步骤S413)。Then, the origin PLC specified by the origin
从取得的连接通路中选择1条连接通路(步骤S414)。然后,将该连接通路中的起点PLC选择作为处理对象,执行C1处理(步骤S415)。One connection path is selected from the obtained connection paths (step S414 ). Then, the starting point PLC in the connection path is selected as a processing target, and the C1 processing is executed (step S415 ).
如图51-2所示,在C1处理中,首先对从处理对象的PLC至终点PLC为止是否存在大于或等于2个不同的网络进行判定(步骤S431)。在不存在大于或等于2个不同的网络的情况(在步骤S431中为否的情况)下,结束C1处理,返回图51-1的处理。另外,在存在不同的网络的情况(在步骤S431中为是的情况)下,在所选择的连接通路中,将终点PLC的上一项的数据所记载的网络序号作为传送目标网络序号进行输出(步骤S432)。As shown in FIG. 51-2 , in the C1 process, first, it is determined whether there are two or more different networks from the process target PLC to the destination PLC (step S431 ). When there are no two or more different networks (NO in step S431 ), the process of C1 is terminated, and the process returns to the process of FIG. 51-1 . In addition, when there is a different network (YES in step S431), in the selected connection path, the network number described in the data of the previous item of the destination PLC is output as the transfer destination network number (step S432).
然后,在所选择的连接通路中,将处理对象PLC的下一项的数据中记载的网络序号作为中继目标网络序号进行输出(步骤S433),并且,针对处理对象PLC的下下项的数据中所记载的PLC,将其在步骤S433输出的中继目标网络中的站点序号作为中继目标站点序号进行输出(步骤S434)。Then, in the selected connection path, the network number described in the data of the next item of the processing target PLC is output as the relay target network number (step S433), and the data of the next item of the processing target PLC The PLC described in , outputs the station number in the relay destination network output in step S433 as the relay destination station number (step S434 ).
然后,将处理对象PLC的下下项的数据中记载的PLC选择作为处理对象(步骤S435),返回步骤S431,重复进行上述处理。Then, the PLC described in the data of the next item under the processing target PLC is selected as the processing target (step S435 ), and the process returns to step S431 to repeat the above-mentioned processing.
如果C1处理完成,则返回图51-1,通过连接通路反转功能模块1271生成将所选择的连接通路的数据逆序化而成的逆连接通路(步骤S416)。即,所选择的连接通路的起点PLC成为终点PLC,终点PLC成为起点PLC。If the C1 process is completed, return to FIG. 51-1 , and generate an inverse connection path obtained by inverting the data of the selected connection path through the connection path inversion function module 1271 (step S416 ). That is, the start point PLC of the selected connection path becomes the end point PLC, and the end point PLC becomes the start point PLC.
然后,将逆序化后的逆连接通路的数据中的起点PLC的下下项的数据中所记载的PLC,选择作为处理对象(步骤S417),实施C1处理(步骤S418)。Then, the PLC described in the data of the next item below the starting point PLC in the data of the reversed connection path after the reverse sequence is selected as a processing target (step S417 ), and C1 processing is performed (step S418 ).
在逆连接通路的C1处理完成之后,确认是否对在步骤S413中取得的所有连接通路都进行了处理(步骤S419),在存在没有进行处理的连接通路的情况(在步骤S419中为否的情况)下,返回步骤S414,重复执行上述处理。另外,在对所有连接通路进行了处理的情况(在步骤S419中为是的情况)下,路由参数计算处理完成。After the C1 processing of the reverse connection path is completed, it is confirmed whether all the connection paths obtained in step S413 have been processed (step S419), and if there is a connection path that has not been processed (in the case of No in step S419), ), return to step S414, and execute the above processing repeatedly. In addition, when all the connection paths have been processed (YES in step S419 ), the routing parameter calculation processing is completed.
(2)处理的具体例子(2) Specific examples of processing
由于在上述说明中,对路由参数计算处理的概要进行了记述,所以例举具有图28的结构的控制系统的情况,对本处理的具体例子如下进行说明。将该图28所示的控制系统作为对象,将PLCπ作为起点PLC,进行实施方式4的图36-1~图36-3所示的脱机连接通路解析处理。图52是表示在图28的控制系统中连接至各个PLC的连接通路的一个例子的图。另外,图53-1~图53-4是通过路由参数计算处理而得到的在各个PLC中设定的路由参数。In the above description, the outline of the routing parameter calculation processing has been described, so a specific example of this processing will be described below by taking the case of the control system having the configuration of FIG. 28 as an example. The control system shown in FIG. 28 is used as an object, and the off-line connection path analysis process shown in FIGS. 36-1 to 36-3 of
(2-1)连接通路取得处理(2-1) Connection path acquisition processing
首先,将由起点PLC指定部113指定的进行瞬时传送的请求源PLCπ作为起点PLC,通过进行图36-1~图36-3所示的脱机连接通路解析处理,得到图52所示的连接通路Pαg~Pψg。First, the connection path shown in FIG. 52 is obtained by performing the off-line connection path analysis processing shown in FIGS. Pαg~Pψg.
(2-2)连接通路Pαg(2-2) Connecting pathway Pαg
从图52的连接通路中,首先选择连接通路Pαg,针对该连接通路Pαg进行下述处理。From the connection paths in FIG. 52 , first, the connection path Pαg is selected, and the following processing is performed on the connection path Pαg.
(2-2-1)连接通路的PLCπ(2-2-1) PLCπ of connection path
将连接通路Pαg中的起点PLC即PLCπ作为处理对象PLC,执行图51-2所示的C1处理。由于在将PLCπ作为处理对象的C1处理中,针对连接通路Pαg,至终点PLC为止不存在大于或等于2个不同的网络,所以结束将PLCπ作为处理对象PLC的C1处理。The process C1 shown in FIG. 51-2 is executed with PLCπ, which is the starting point PLC in the connection path Pαg, as the processing target PLC. In the C1 process with PLCπ as the processing target, there are no more than two different networks up to the destination PLC for the connection path Pαg, so the C1 process with PLCπ as the processing target PLC is terminated.
(2-2-2)逆连接通路的PLCπ(2-2-2) PLCπ of reverse junction pathway
然后,将连接通路Pαg的连接通路数据“PLCπ→控制器间网络No.1→PLCα”逆序化后的“PLCα→控制器间网络No.1→PLCπ”作为逆连接通路Pαg’。并且,将在该逆连接通路Pαg’中的起点PLC即PLCα的下下项的数据中所记载的PLC即PLCπ选择作为处理对象PLC,执行C1处理。但是,由于在将该PLCπ作为处理对象的C1处理中,针对逆连接通路Pαg’,至终点PLC为止不存在大于或等于2个不同的网络,所以结束将PLCπ作为处理对象PLC的C1处理。Then, the connection path data "PLCπ→inter-controller network No. 1→PLCα" of the connection path Pαg is desequenced "PLCα→inter-controller network No. 1→PLCπ" as the reverse connection path Pαg'. Then, PLCπ, which is the PLC described in the data of the next item below PLCα, which is the starting point PLC, in the reverse connection path Pαg' is selected as the processing target PLC, and the C1 process is executed. However, in the C1 process with PLCπ as the processing target, there are no more than two different networks up to the destination PLC for the reverse connection path Pαg', so the C1 process with PLC π as the processing target PLC is terminated.
(2-3)连接通路Pεg(2-3) Connecting pathway Pεg
从图52的连接通路中选择连接通路Pεg,如果针对该连接通路Pεg进行处理,则得到与(2-2)的连接通路Pαg相同的结果,没有计算出的路由参数。If the connection path Pεg is selected from the connection paths in FIG. 52 and the connection path Pεg is processed, the same result as the connection path Pαg of (2-2) is obtained, and there is no calculated routing parameter.
(2-4)连接通路Pβg(2-4) Connection pathway Pβg
从图52的连接通路中选择连接通路Pβg,针对该连接通路Pβg进行以下处理。The connection path Pβg is selected from the connection paths in FIG. 52, and the following processing is performed on the connection path Pβg.
(2-4-1)连接通路(2-4-1) Connection path
将连接通路Pβg中的起点PLC即PLCπ作为处理对象PLC,执行图51-2所示的C1处理。在将PLCπ作为处理对象的C1处理中,针对连接通路Pβg,至终点PLC为止存在大于或等于2个不同的网络。由此,将终点PLC即PLCβ的上1项的数据(数据3)中记载的信息系统网络No.5的网络序号“5”作为传送目标网络序号进行输出。The process C1 shown in FIG. 51-2 is executed with PLCπ, which is the starting point PLC in the connection path Pβg, as the processing target PLC. In the C1 processing for which PLCπ is the processing target, there are two or more different networks up to the destination PLC for the connection path Pβg. Thereby, the network number "5" of the information system network No. 5 described in the data (data 3) of the previous item of PLCβ which is the destination PLC is output as the transfer destination network number.
另外,将在处理对象PLCπ的下1项的数据(数据1)中记载的控制器间网络No.1的网络序号“1”,作为中继目标网络序号进行输出。并且,从脱机网络结构信息保持部122取得在处理对象PLCπ的下下项的数据(数据2)中记载的PLC即PLCα在控制器间网络No.1中的站点序号“1”,作为中继目标站点序号进行输出。In addition, the network number "1" of the inter-controller network No. 1 described in the next item of data (data 1) of the processing target PLCπ is output as the relay destination network number. And, the station number "1" of the PLC α in the inter-controller network No. 1, which is the PLC described in the data (data 2) of the next item below the processing target PLC π, is acquired from the offline network configuration
然后,将处理对象PLCπ的下下项的数据(数据2)中记载的PLCα选择作为处理对象,执行C1处理。由于在将PLCα作为处理对象的C1处理中,针对连接通路Pβg,至终点PLC为止不存在大于或等于2个不同的网络,所以结束将连接通路PLCα作为处理对象的C1处理。其结果在图53-1的第501行中示出。Then, PLCα described in the data (data 2 ) below the processing target PLCπ is selected as the processing target, and the C1 process is executed. In the C1 process targeting PLCα, there are no more than two different networks up to the destination PLC for the connection path Pβg, so the C1 process targeting the connection path PLCα is terminated. The result is shown in
(2-4-2)逆连接通路(2-4-2) Reverse junction pathway
然后,将连接通路Pβg的连接通路数据“PLCπ→控制器间网络No.1→PLCα→信息系统网络No.5→PLCβ”进行逆序化后的“PLCβ→信息系统网络No.5→PLCα→控制器间网络No.1→PLCπ”作为逆连接通路Pβg’。并且,将该逆连接通路Pβg’中的起点PLC即PLCβ的下下项的数据中记载的PLCα选择作为处理对象,执行C1处理。但是,由于在将该PLCα作为处理对象的C1处理中,针对逆连接通路Pβg’,至终点PLC为止不存在大于或等于2个不同的网络,所以结束将PLCα作为处理对象PLC的C1处理。Then, the connection path data "PLCπ→inter-controller network No.1→PLCα→information system network No.5→PLCβ" of the connection path Pβg is reversed to "PLCβ→information system network No.5→PLCα→control Inter-device network No.1→PLCπ" as the reverse connection path Pβg'. Then, PLCα described in the data of the lower item of PLCβ which is the starting point PLC in the reverse connection path Pβg' is selected as the processing target, and the C1 processing is executed. However, in the C1 process with PLCα as the processing target, there are no more than two different networks up to the destination PLC for the reverse connection path Pβg', so the C1 process with PLCα as the processing target PLC is terminated.
(2-5)连接通路Pμg(2-5) Connecting pathway Pμg
从图52的连接通路中选择连接通路Pμg,如果针对该连接通路Pμg进行处理,则得到与(2-4)的连接通路Pβg相同的结果。即,计算出的路由参数相同,没有新输出的路由参数。If the connection path Pμg is selected from the connection paths in FIG. 52 and the connection path Pμg is processed, the same result as that of the connection path Pβg in (2-4) is obtained. That is, the calculated routing parameters are the same, and there are no new output routing parameters.
(2-6)连接通路Pθg(2-6) Connecting pathway Pθg
从图52的连接通路中选择连接通路Pθg,针对该连接通路Pθg进行下述处理。A connection path Pθg is selected from the connection paths in FIG. 52, and the following processing is performed on the connection path Pθg.
(2-6-1)连接通路(2-6-1) Connection path
将连接通路Pθg中的起点PLC即PLCπ作为处理对象PLC,进行图51-2所示的C1处理。在将PLCπ作为处理对象的C1处理中,针对连接通路Pθg,至终点PLC为止存在大于或等于2个不同的网络。由此,将在终点PLC即PLCθ的上1项的数据(数据5)中记载的控制器间网络No.2的网络序号“2”,作为传送目标网络序号进行输出。The process C1 shown in FIG. 51-2 is performed with PLCπ, which is the starting point PLC in the connection path Pθg, as the processing target PLC. In the C1 process which makes PLCπ the processing object, there exist two or more different networks up to the destination PLC with respect to the connection path Pθg. As a result, the network number "2" of the inter-controller network No. 2 described in the data (data 5) of the previous item of PLCθ, which is the destination PLC, is output as the transfer destination network number.
另外,将在处理对象PLCπ的下一项的数据(数据1)中记载的控制器间网络No.1的网络序号“1”,作为中继目标网络序号进行输出。并且,从脱机网络结构信息保持部122取得处理对象PLCπ的下下项的数据(数据2)中记载的PLC即PLCα在控制器间网络No.1中的站点序号“1”,作为中继目标站点序号进行输出。其结果在图53-1的第502行中示出。In addition, the network number "1" of the inter-controller network No. 1 described in the next item of data (data 1) of the processing target PLCπ is output as the relay destination network number. In addition, the station number "1" of the PLC α in the inter-controller network No. 1 of the PLC α described in the data (data 2) under the next item of the processing target PLC π is obtained from the off-line network configuration
然后,将处理对象PLCπ的下下项的数据(数据2)中记载的PLCα选择作为处理对象,执行C1处理。在将PLCα作为处理对象的C1处理中,针对连接通路Pθg,至终点PLC为止存在大于或等于2个不同的网络。由此,将在终点PLC即PLCθ的上1项的数据(数据5)中记载的控制器间网络22B的网络序号“2”,作为传送目标网络序号进行输出。Then, PLCα described in the data (data 2 ) below the processing target PLCπ is selected as the processing target, and the C1 process is executed. In the C1 process for which PLCα is the processing target, there are two or more different networks up to the destination PLC for the connection path Pθg. As a result, the network number "2" of the
另外,将在处理对象PLCα的下1项的数据(数据3)中记载的信息系统网络No.5的网络序号“5”,作为中继目标网络序号进行输出。并且,从脱机网络结构信息保持部122取得处理对象PLCα的下下项的数据(数据4)中记载的PLC即PLCβ在信息系统网络No.5中的站点序号“2”,作为中继目标站点序号进行输出。其结果在图53-2的第504行中示出。In addition, the network number "5" of the information system network No. 5 described in the next item of data (data 3) of the processing target PLCα is output as the relay destination network number. In addition, the station number "2" of the PLC β in the information system network No. 5, which is the PLC described in the data (data 4) under the next item of the processing target PLCα, is acquired from the offline network structure
然后,将处理对象PLCα的下下项的数据中记载的PLC即PLCβ作为处理对象PLC,进行C1处理。由于在将PLCβ作为处理对象的C1处理中,针对连接通路Pθg,至终点PLC为止不存在大于或等于2个不同的网络,所以结束将PLCβ作为处理对象的C1处理。Then, the process C1 is performed with the PLC β described in the data under the subparagraph of the processing target PLC α as the processing target PLC. In the C1 process targeting PLCβ, there are no more than two different networks up to the destination PLC for the connection path Pθg, so the C1 process targeting PLCβ is terminated.
(2-6-2)逆连接通路(2-6-2) Reverse junction pathway
接着,将连接通路Pθg的连接通路数据“PLCπ→控制器间网络No.1→PLCα→信息系统网络No.5→PLCβ→控制器间网络No.2→PLCθ”进行逆序化后的“PLCθ→控制器间网络No.2→PLCβ→信息系统网络No.5→PLCα→控制器间网络No.1→PLCπ”作为逆连接通路Pθg’。并且,将在该逆连接通路Pθg’中的起点PLC即PLCθ的下下项的数据中记载的PLCβ选择作为处理对象,执行C1处理。Next, the connection path data "PLCπ→inter-controller network No.1→PLCα→information system network No.5→PLCβ→inter-controller network No.2→PLCθ" of the connection path Pθg is reversed to "PLCθ→ Inter-controller network No. 2→PLCβ→information system network No.5→PLCα→inter-controller network No.1→PLCπ” as the reverse connection path Pθg′. Then, the PLCβ described in the data under the next item of PLCθ, which is the starting point PLC in the reverse connection path Pθg', is selected as the processing target, and the C1 processing is executed.
在将PLCβ作为处理对象的C1处理中,针对连接通路Pθg’,至终点PLC为止存在大于或等于2个不同的网络。由此,将在终点PLC即PLCπ的上1项的数据中记载的控制器间网络No.1的网络序号“1”作为传送目标网络序号进行输出。另外,将在处理对象PLCβ的下一项的数据(数据3)中记载的信息系统网络No.5的网络序号“5”,作为中继目标网络序号进行输出。并且,从脱机网络结构信息保持部122取得在处理对象PLCβ的下下项的数据(数据4)中记载的PLC即PLCα在信息系统网络No.5中的站点序号“1”,作为中继目标站点序号进行输出。其结果在图53-3的第506行中示出。In the C1 process that targets PLCβ, there are two or more different networks up to the destination PLC for the connection path Pθg'. As a result, the network number "1" of the inter-controller network No. 1 described in the data of the previous item of PLCπ, which is the destination PLC, is output as the transfer destination network number. In addition, the network number "5" of the information system network No. 5 described in the next item of data (data 3) of the processing target PLCβ is output as the relay destination network number. In addition, the station number "1" of the PLC α in the information system network No. 5, which is the PLC α described in the data (data 4) under the next item of the processing target PLC β, is obtained from the off-line network structure
然后,将处理对象PLCβ的下下项的数据中记载的PLCα选择作为处理对象,执行C1处理。由于在将PLCα作为处理对象的C1处理中,针对连接通路Pθg’,至终点PLC为止不存在大于或等于2个不同的网络,所以结束将连接通路PLCα作为处理对象的C1处理。Then, the PLCα described in the data under the subparagraph of the processing object PLCβ is selected as the processing object, and the C1 processing is executed. In the C1 process targeting PLCα, there are no more than two different networks up to the destination PLC for the connection path Pθg', so the C1 process targeting the connection path PLCα is terminated.
(2-7)连接通路Pκg(2-7) Connection pathway Pκg
从图52的连接通路中选择连接通路Pκg,如果针对该连接通路Pκg进行处理,则得到与(2-6)的连接通路Pθg相同的结果。即,计算出的路由参数相同,没有新输出的路由参数。If the connection path Pκg is selected from the connection paths in FIG. 52 and the connection path Pκg is processed, the same result as that of the connection path Pθg in (2-6) is obtained. That is, the calculated routing parameters are the same, and there are no new output routing parameters.
(2-8)连接通路Pωg(2-8) Connecting pathway Pωg
从图52的连接通路中选择连接通路Pωg,针对该连接通路Pωg进行下述处理。A connection path Pωg is selected from the connection paths in FIG. 52 , and the following processing is performed on the connection path Pωg.
(2-8-1)连接通路(2-8-1) Connection path
将连接通路Pωg中的起点PLC即PLCπ作为处理对象PLC,进行图51-2所示的C1处理。在将PLCπ作为处理对象的C1处理中,针对连接通路Pωg,至终点PLC为止存在大于或等于2个不同的网络。由此,将在终点PLC即PLCω的上1项的数据(数据5)中记载的控制器间网络No.3的网络序号“3”,作为传送目标网络序号进行输出。The process C1 shown in FIG. 51-2 is performed with PLCπ, which is the starting point PLC in the connection path Pωg, as the processing target PLC. In the C1 processing for which PLCπ is the processing target, there are two or more different networks up to the destination PLC for the connection path Pωg. Thereby, the network number "3" of the inter-controller network No. 3 described in the data (data 5) of the previous item of PLCω which is the destination PLC is output as the transfer destination network number.
另外,将在处理对象PLCπ的下1项的数据(数据1)中记载的控制器间网络No.1的网络序号“1”,作为中继目标网络序号进行输出。并且,从脱机网络结构信息中取得在处理对象PLCπ的下下项的数据(数据2)中记载的PLC即PLCα在控制器间网络No.1中的站点序号“1”,作为中继目标站点序号进行输出。其结果在图53-1的第503行中示出。In addition, the network number "1" of the inter-controller network No. 1 described in the next item of data (data 1) of the processing target PLCπ is output as the relay destination network number. In addition, the station number "1" of the PLC α in the inter-controller network No. 1, which is described in the data (data 2) of the next item under the processing target PLCπ, is obtained from the offline network structure information as the relay destination The station number is output. The result is shown in
然后,将处理对象PLCπ的下下项的数据(数据2)中记载的PLCα选择作为处理对象,执行C1处理。在将PLCα作为处理对象的C1处理中,针对连接通路Pωg,至终点PLC为止存在大于或等于2个不同的网络。由此,将终点PLC即PLCω的上1项的数据(数据5)中记载的控制器间网络No.3的网络序号“3”,作为传送目标网络序号进行输出。Then, PLCα described in the data (data 2 ) below the processing target PLCπ is selected as the processing target, and the C1 process is executed. In the C1 process for which PLCα is the processing target, there are two or more different networks up to the destination PLC for the connection path Pωg. As a result, the network number "3" of the inter-controller network No. 3 described in the data (data 5) of the previous item of PLCω as the destination PLC is output as the transfer destination network number.
另外,将在处理对象PLCα的下1项的数据(数据3)中记载的信息系统网络No.5的网络序号“5”,作为中继目标网络序号进行输出。并且,从脱机网络结构信息保持部122取得处理对象PLCα的下下项的数据(数据4)中记载的PLC即PLCμ在信息系统网络No.5中的站点序号“3”,作为中继目标站点序号进行输出。其结果在图53-2的第505行中示出。In addition, the network number "5" of the information system network No. 5 described in the next item of data (data 3) of the processing target PLCα is output as the relay destination network number. In addition, the station number "3" of the PLC μ in the information system network No. 5, which is the PLC described in the data (data 4) under the next item of the processing target PLCα, is obtained from the off-line network configuration
然后,将处理对象PLCα的下下项的数据中记载的PLC即PLCμ作为处理对象,执行C1处理。在将PLCμ作为处理对象的C1处理中,由于针对连接通路Pωg,至终点PLC为止不存在大于或等于2个不同的网络,所以结束将PLCβ作为处理对象的C1处理。Then, the process C1 is executed with the PLC μ, which is the PLC described in the data of the next item under the process target PLCα, as the process target. In the C1 process with PLCμ as the processing target, there are no more than two different networks up to the destination PLC for the connection path Pωg, so the C1 process with PLCβ as the processing target ends.
(2-8-2)逆连接通路(2-8-2) Reverse junction pathway
接着,将连接通路Pωg的连接通路数据“PLCπ→控制器间网络No.1→PLCα→信息系统网络No.5→PLCμ→控制器间网络No.3→PLCω”进行逆序化后的“PLCω→控制器间网络No.3→PLCμ→信息系统网络No.5→PLCα→控制器间网络No.1→PLCπ”作为逆连接通路Pωg’。并且,将在该逆连接通路Pωg’中的起点PLC即PLCω的下下项的数据中记载的PLCμ选择作为处理对象,执行C1处理。Next, "PLCω→ Inter-controller network No. 3→PLCμ→information system network No.5→PLCα→inter-controller network No.1→PLCπ” as the reverse connection path Pωg′. Then, the PLCμ described in the data of the lower item of PLCω, which is the starting point PLC in the reverse connection path Pωg', is selected as the processing target, and the C1 processing is executed.
在将PLCμ作为处理对象的C1处理中,针对连接通路Pωg’,至终点PLC为止存在大于或等于2个不同的网络。由此,将在终点PLC即PLCπ的上1项的数据中记载的控制器间网络No.1的网络序号“1”,作为传送目标网络序号进行输出。另外,将在处理对象PLCμ的下一项的数据中记载的信息系统网络No.5的网络序号“5”,作为中继目标网络序号进行输出。并且,从脱机网络结构信息保持部122取得处理对象PLCμ的下下项的数据中记载的PLC即PLCα在信息系统网络No.5中的站点序号“1”,作为中继目标站点序号进行输出。其结果在图53-4的第507行中示出。In the C1 process with PLCμ as the processing target, there are two or more different networks up to the destination PLC for the connection path Pωg'. Thereby, the network number "1" of the inter-controller network No. 1 described in the data of the previous item of PLCπ, which is the destination PLC, is output as the transfer destination network number. In addition, the network number "5" of the information system network No. 5 described in the data of the next item of the processing target PLCμ is output as the relay destination network number. In addition, the site number "1" of the PLC α in the information system network No. 5, which is the PLC α described in the data of the next item below the processing target PLC μ, is obtained from the off-line network structure
然后,将处理对象PLCμ的下下项的数据中记载的PLCα选择作为处理对象,执行C1处理。由于在将PLCα作为处理对象的C1处理中,针对连接通路Pωg’,至终点PLC为止不存在大于或等于2个不同的网络,所以结束将连接通路PLCα作为处理对象的C1处理。Then, the PLCα described in the data of the next item under the processing object PLCμ is selected as the processing object, and the C1 processing is executed. In the C1 process targeting PLCα, there are no more than two different networks up to the destination PLC for the connection path Pωg', so the C1 process targeting the connection path PLCα ends.
(2-9)连接通路Pψg(2-9) Connecting pathway Pψg
从图52的连接通路中选择连接通路Pψg,如果针对该连接通路Pψg进行处理,则得到与(2-8)的连接通路Pωg相同的结果。即,计算出的路由参数相同,没有新输出的路由参数。If the connection path Pψg is selected from the connection paths in FIG. 52 and the connection path Pψg is processed, the same result as the connection path Pωg of (2-8) is obtained. That is, the calculated routing parameters are the same, and there are no new output routing parameters.
将如上所述求出的图53-1~图53-4的路由参数,对各自的名称栏所示的PLC进行设定。即,图53-1是在PLCπ中设定的路由参数,图53-2是在PLCα中设定的路由参数,图53-3是在PLCβ中设定的路由参数,图53-4是在PLCμ中设定的路由参数。Set the routing parameters in Fig. 53-1 to Fig. 53-4 obtained as described above to the PLCs shown in the respective name columns. That is, Figure 53-1 shows the routing parameters set in PLCπ, Figure 53-2 shows the routing parameters set in PLCα, Figure 53-3 shows the routing parameters set in PLCβ, and Figure 53-4 shows the routing parameters set in PLCα. Routing parameters set in PLCμ.
根据本实施方式6,由于可以由控制系统设计装置100执行本来人工计算的处理,所以具有节省计算路由参数的工时的效果。另外还具有下述效果,即,在针对现有的控制系统的结构进行追加变更的情况、或者构筑新控制系统的情况下,也可以容易地设定包含针对PLC的路由参数在内的网络参数。并且,由于进行连接通路的显示,所以还具有对计算出的各个PLC的路由参数用于哪条连接通路的情况可以容易地进行确认的效果。According to Embodiment 6, since the control
实施方式7Embodiment 7
在本实施方式7中,针对下述控制系统设计装置及控制系统设计方法进行说明,即,在对已经进行动作的控制系统的网络参数进行变更时,可以自动地将包含伴随该变动而产生的路由参数的变更在内的各个PLC的网络参数进行改写。In Embodiment 7, a control system design device and a control system design method that can automatically include network parameters of a control system that is already in operation when changing Rewrite the network parameters of each PLC including the change of routing parameters.
图54是示意地表示本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置的实施方式7的功能结构的框图。该控制系统设计装置100具有通信部111、显示部112、起点PLC指定部113、联机网络结构信息收集部114、联机连接通路保持部115、联机网络结构信息保持部116、显示对象坐标计算部117、系统结构显示部118、系统结构编辑部121、脱机网络结构信息保持部122、连接通路解析选择部123、脱机连接通路保持部125、连接通路显示部120、参数集中改写部128、以及控制上述各个处理部的控制部119。更详细地说,该控制系统设计装置100具有下述结构,即,在实施方式1的结构和实施方式6的结构的基础上,删除吞吐量模型保持部124,并进一步设置参数集中改写部128。FIG. 54 is a block diagram schematically showing the functional configuration of Embodiment 7 of the control system design device according to the present invention. This control
参数集中改写部128针对控制系统自动地进行包含路由参数的变更在内的网络参数的变更。此时,以不会由于参数变更而无法对构成控制系统的PLC进行访问的顺序,进行网络参数的改写。该网络参数集中改写部128对应于权利要求书中的参数集中改写单元。此外,对于与在上述实施方式中说明的结构要素相同的结构要素,标注相同标号并省略其说明。The centralized parameter rewriting unit 128 automatically changes network parameters including routing parameters for the control system. At this time, network parameters are rewritten in such an order that access to the PLC constituting the control system will not be disabled due to parameter changes. The centralized network parameter rewriting unit 128 corresponds to a centralized parameter rewriting unit in the claims. In addition, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same constituent elements as those described in the above-mentioned embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.
(1)处理的概要(1) Outline of processing
图55-1~图55-2是表示参数集中改写处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。首先,与构成控制系统的其中一个PLC连接的控制系统设计装置100,通过在实施方式1中说明的方法,从进行动作的控制系统取得网络结构信息(步骤S451)。下面,将该网络结构信息称为联机网络结构信息。FIGS. 55-1 to 55-2 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of collective parameter rewriting processing. First, the control
然后,针对所取得的联机网络结构信息,在脱机状态下对参数的变更进行编辑(步骤S452),生成脱机网络结构信息。此时,假定使得1个网络的网络参数被变更。然后,基于在脱机状态下编辑出的脱机网络结构信息,计算路由参数(步骤S453)。Then, for the acquired online network configuration information, edit parameters in an offline state (step S452 ), and generate offline network configuration information. At this time, it is assumed that the network parameters of one network are changed. Then, based on the offline network structure information edited in the offline state, route parameters are calculated (step S453 ).
接着,对联机网络结构信息和编辑出的脱机网络结构信息进行比较,提取参数存在变更的网络(步骤S454)。并且,针对所提取的网络的各个PLC,执行图55-2示出的参数改写处理(步骤S455)。Next, compare the online network structure information with the edited offline network structure information, and extract the network whose parameters have been changed (step S454 ). And the parameter rewriting process shown to FIG. 55-2 is performed about each PLC of the extracted network (step S455).
转移至图55-2,在与所提取的网络连接的PLC中,将站点序号最大的普通站点PLC的参数改写为新参数(步骤S471)。然后,进行改写处理,将该网络的管理站点PLC所保持的网络参数的总站点数减去1个(步骤S472)。Moving to FIG. 55-2 , among the PLCs connected to the extracted network, the parameters of the normal station PLC with the largest station number are rewritten into new parameters (step S471 ). Then, rewriting processing is performed to subtract one from the total number of stations of the network parameters held by the management station PLC of the network (step S472 ).
然后,对该网络的管理站点PLC的网络参数中的总站点数是否成为1进行判定(步骤S473)。在管理站点PLC的网络参数中的总站点数不是1的情况(在步骤S473中为否的情况)下,返回步骤S471,重复上述处理,直至管理站点PLC的网络参数中的总站点数成为1为止。Then, it is determined whether or not the total number of stations in the network parameters of the management station PLC of the network is 1 (step S473 ). If the total number of stations in the network parameters of the management station PLC is not 1 (No in step S473), return to step S471 and repeat the above process until the total number of stations in the network parameters of the management station PLC becomes 1.
另外,在管理站点PLC的网络参数中的总站点数为1的情况(在步骤S473中为是的情况)下,将该网络的管理站点PLC的参数改写为新参数(步骤S474),参数改写处理完成,处理返回图55-1。In addition, when the total number of stations in the network parameters of the management station PLC is 1 (in the case of YES in step S473), the parameters of the management station PLC of the network are rewritten into new parameters (step S474), and the parameter rewriting process Finished, the process returns to Figure 55-1.
返回图55-1,将在步骤S454中所选择的网络相关联的路由参数进行改写(步骤S456),参数集中改写处理完成。Returning to FIG. 55-1 , the routing parameters associated with the network selected in step S454 are rewritten (step S456 ), and the centralized parameter rewriting process is completed.
(2)处理的具体例子(2) Specific examples of processing
由于在上述的说明中,对参数集中改写处理的概要进行了记述,所以下面针对该处理的具体例子进行详细说明。在这里,针对下述情况进行说明,即,对于根据通过实施方式6计算出的图53-1~图55-4的路由参数而进行动作的图28所示的控制系统,将控制器间网络No.3变更为控制器间网络No.10。In the above description, the outline of the parameter collective rewriting process has been described, so a specific example of this process will be described in detail below. Here, a case will be described in which the inter-controller network is connected to the control system shown in FIG. 28 that operates based on the routing parameters in FIGS. No.3 is changed to inter-controller network No.10.
首先,根据实施方式1中说明的方法,取得进行动作的图28所示的控制系统的联机网络结构信息,并储存在联机网络结构信息保持部116中。First, according to the method described in
然后,根据实施方式4中说明的方法,针对联机网络结构信息,由系统结构编辑部121生成在脱机状态下将控制器间网络No.3变更为控制器间网络No.10的脱机网络结构信息,并储存在脱机网络结构信息保持部122中。另外,根据实施方式6中说明的方法,基于变更后的脱机网络结构信息,进行路由参数的计算。图56-1~图56-4是表示控制系统的结构变更后的路由参数的图。在图56-1的第513行和图56-2的第515行中,成为分别将图53-1的503和图53-2的505中的传送目标网络序号为“3”的部分变更为“10”的形式。Then, according to the method described in
然后,将联机网络结构信息和脱机网络结构信息进行比较,提取参数存在变更的网络。在这里,提取出如下情况,即,联机网络结构信息的控制器间网络No.3的部分在脱机网络结构信息中变更为控制器间网络No.10。Then, the online network structure information is compared with the offline network structure information, and the network with changed parameters is extracted. Here, it is extracted that the part of the inter-controller network No. 3 in the online network configuration information is changed to the inter-controller network No. 10 in the offline network configuration information.
然后,针对存在变更的控制器间网络No.3,执行图55-2所示的各个PLC参数的改写处理。首先,在进行动作的控制系统中,将与控制器间网络No.3连接的PLC中的站点序号最大的普通站点PLC即PLCψ(站点序号3)的参数改写为新参数。即,进行从“控制器间网络No.3的普通站点的站点序号3”至“控制器间网络No.10的普通站点的站点序号3”的改写处理。Then, the rewriting process of each PLC parameter shown in FIG. 55-2 is performed with respect to the inter-controller network No. 3 which was changed. First, in the operating control system, among the PLCs connected to the inter-controller network No. 3, the parameters of PLCψ (station number 3), which is the normal station PLC with the highest station number, are rewritten to new parameters. That is, rewriting processing is performed from "the
然后,在进行动作的控制系统中进行改写,将与控制器间网络No.3连接的管理站点PLC即PLCμ的网络参数中的总站点数减去1个。即,将控制器间网络No.3的总站点数从“3”改写为“2”。由此,在该时刻,控制器间网络No.3以与PLCμ和PLCω相连接的状态下进行动作,但PLCψ虽然进行了物理连接,然而处于并不作为控制器间网络No.3的站点而进行动作的状态。Then, rewriting is performed in the operating control system, and the total number of stations in the network parameters of PLCμ, which is the management station PLC connected to the inter-controller network No. 3, is subtracted by one. That is, the total number of stations in the inter-controller network No. 3 is rewritten from "3" to "2". Therefore, at this point in time, the inter-controller network No. 3 operates while being connected to PLCμ and PLCω, but PLCψ is physically connected, but it is not a station of the inter-controller network No. 3. The state in which the action is performed.
然后,由于与控制器间网络No.3连接的管理站点PLC即PLCμ的网络参数中的总站点数是“2”而不是“1”,所以在该时刻,将与控制器间网络No.3连接的PLC中的站点序号最大的普通站点PLC即PLCω(站点序号2)的参数改写为新参数。即,进行从“控制器间网络No.3的普通站点的站点序号2”至“控制器间网络No.10的普通站点的站点序号2”的改写处理。Then, since the total number of stations in the network parameters of the management station PLC connected to inter-controller network No. The parameters of the common station PLC with the largest station serial number in the PLC ie PLCω (station serial number 2) are rewritten as new parameters. That is, rewriting processing is performed from "the
然后,将与控制器间网络No.3连接的管理站点PLC即PLCμ的网络参数中的总站点数减去1个。即,将控制器间网络No.3的总站点序号从“2”改写为“1”。由此,在该时刻,控制器间网络No.3以仅与PLCμ连接的状态进行动作,虽然PLCω和PLCψ进行了物理连接,但是处于并不作为控制器间网络No.3的站点而进行动作的状态。Then, one is subtracted from the total number of stations in the network parameters of the PLCμ which is the management station PLC connected to the inter-controller network No. 3 . That is, the total station number of inter-controller network No. 3 is rewritten from "2" to "1". Therefore, at this point in time, inter-controller network No. 3 operates in a state connected only to PLCμ, and although PLCω and PLCψ are physically connected, they operate at a station that is not inter-controller network No. 3 status.
然后,由于与控制器间网络No.3连接的管理站点PLC即PLCμ的网络参数中的总站点数为“1”,所以将该管理站点的PLCμ的参数改写为新参数。即,从“控制器间网络No.3的管理站点的站点序号1”改写至“控制器间网络No.10的管理站点的站点序号1”。由此,在该定时,控制器间网络No.3变更为控制器间网络No.10,在控制器间网络No.10中,以与PLCμ、PLCω和PLCψ连接的状态进行动作。由此图55-2的各个PLC的参数改写处理结束。Then, since the total number of stations is "1" in the network parameters of the PLCμ which is the management station PLC connected to the inter-controller network No. 3, the parameters of the PLCμ of the management station are rewritten to new parameters. That is, it is rewritten from "the
然后,进行改写与存在变更的控制器间网络No.3相关联的路由参数的处理。在这里,由于控制器间网络No.3变更为控制器间网络No.10,所以伴随该情况,在重新自动计算的图56-1~图56-4所示的路由参数中,改写为与控制器间网络No.10相关联的路由参数。即,针对PLCπ,写入图56-1所示的新路由参数Pπq,针对PLCα,写入图56-2所示的新路由参数Pαq。此外,由于存在变更的网络仅此而已,所以参数集中改写处理完成。Then, a process of rewriting the routing parameters associated with the changed inter-controller network No. 3 is performed. Here, since inter-controller network No. 3 is changed to inter-controller network No. 10, in connection with this situation, in the routing parameters shown in Fig. 56-1 to Fig. Routing parameters associated with inter-controller network No.10. That is, for PLCπ, a new routing parameter Pπq shown in FIG. 56-1 is written, and for PLCα, a new routing parameter Pαq shown in FIG. 56-2 is written. In addition, since there are only changed networks, the parameter intensive rewriting process is completed.
根据本实施方式7,具有下述效果,即,在变更网络参数时,可以将包含路由参数在内的网络参数的变更,自动地向存在变更的PLC写入。在现有技术中,在网络参数变更时,需要在进行变更的各个PLC上连接控制系统设计装置100,分别写入新的设定,非常繁琐,但在本实施方式7中,具有可以经由网络对各个PLC的网络参数进行变更的效果。According to the seventh embodiment, there is an effect that, when network parameters are changed, changes in network parameters including routing parameters can be automatically written to the PLC in which the changes have occurred. In the prior art, when network parameters are changed, it is very cumbersome to connect the control
实施方式8
实施方式7是针对已经进行动作的系统中的1个网络变更参数的情况下有效的方法,在本实施方式8中,说明针对多个网络变更参数的情况。Embodiment 7 is an effective method for changing parameters for one network in an already operating system. In
即使在针对多个网络变更参数的情况下,只要针对各个变更顺次应用实施方式7,就可以自动地改写包含路由参数的变更在内的各个PLC的网络参数。但是,由于有时存在需要进行多次改写路由参数的PLC,所以改写作业虽然自动进行,但是效率低。由此,在本实施方式8中,针对将上述改写作业集中进行的控制系统设计装置和控制系统设计方法进行说明。Even when parameters are changed for a plurality of networks, by sequentially applying Embodiment 7 to each change, the network parameters of each PLC including a change of routing parameters can be automatically rewritten. However, since there may be PLCs that need to rewrite the routing parameters multiple times, the rewriting work is performed automatically, but the efficiency is low. Therefore, in this eighth embodiment, a control system design device and a control system design method that collectively perform the above-mentioned rewriting work will be described.
在本实施方式8中使用的控制系统设计装置的结构,与实施方式7的图54所示的结构相同。但是,参数集中改写部128具有下述功能,即,首先从距离起点PLC最远的网络开始朝向起点PLC顺次进行不包含路由参数在内的网络参数的更新,然后,从距离起点PLC最近的PLC开始朝向较远的网络的PLC顺次进行路由参数的更新。由此,可以避免网络参数更新中无法通信的状态。The configuration of the control system design device used in the eighth embodiment is the same as that shown in FIG. 54 of the seventh embodiment. However, the centralized parameter rewriting unit 128 has a function of updating network parameters excluding routing parameters sequentially from the network farthest from the origin PLC toward the origin PLC, and then updating network parameters from the network closest to the origin PLC. The PLC starts to update the routing parameters sequentially toward the PLCs of the farther network. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a state where communication cannot be performed during network parameter update.
(1)处理的概要(1) Outline of processing
图57-1~图57-2是表示多个网络的参数集中改写处理步骤的一个例子的流程图。首先,与构成控制系统的其中一个PLC连接的控制系统设计装置100,从进行动作的控制系统取得联机网络结构信息(步骤S511)。其结果储存在联机网络结构信息保持部116中。FIGS. 57-1 to 57-2 are flowcharts showing an example of a procedure for collectively rewriting parameters of a plurality of networks. First, the control
然后,针对取得的联机网络结构信息,在脱机状态下对参数变更进行编辑(步骤S512),其结果作为脱机网络结构信息储存在脱机网络结构信息保持部122中。此时,假定对大于或等于2个网络的网络参数进行变更。然后,基于在脱机状态下编辑出的脱机网络结构信息,进行路由参数的计算处理(步骤S513)。Then, the acquired online network configuration information is edited offline for parameter changes (step S512 ), and the result is stored in the offline network configuration
然后,将在步骤S511中取得的联机网络结构信息和在步骤S512中编辑出的脱机网络结构信息进行比较,提取参数存在变更的网络(步骤S514)。Then, compare the online network structure information obtained in step S511 with the offline network structure information edited in step S512, and extract the network whose parameters have changed (step S514).
然后,从被提取的网络中,参照储存在脱机连接通路保持部125中的脱机连接通路信息,选择1个与起点PLC的连接通路最远的网络(步骤S515),执行图55-2所示的对所选择的网络中的各个PLC的参数改写处理(步骤S516)。此外,由于该PLC的参数改写处理在实施方式7中已经进行了说明,所以省略该说明。Then, from the extracted networks, refer to the offline connection path information stored in the offline connection
如果针对在步骤S515中选择的网络,图55-2的PLC的参数改写处理完成,则判定是否对在步骤S514中提取出的参数存在变更的所有网络都进行了选择(步骤S517)。在没有选择所有存在变更的网络的情况(在步骤S517中为否的情况)下,从提取出的网络中,选择1个距离起点PLC次远的网络(步骤S518)。然后,返回步骤S516,重复执行上述处理,直至对存在变更的所有网络按照与起点PLC的连接通路的远近顺序都进行了选择。另外,在选择了所有存在变更的网络的情况(在步骤S517中为是的情况)下,进行图57-2的路由参数改写处理(步骤S519)。When the PLC parameter rewriting process of FIG. 55-2 is completed for the network selected in step S515, it is determined whether all the networks whose parameters extracted in step S514 have been changed have been selected (step S517). When not all the changed networks have been selected (NO in step S517 ), one of the extracted networks is selected which is next farthest from the starting point PLC (step S518 ). Then, return to step S516, and execute the above-mentioned processing repeatedly until all the networks that have been changed are selected according to the order of distance from the connection path to the starting point PLC. In addition, when all the changed networks are selected (YES in step S517), the routing parameter rewriting process of FIG. 57-2 is performed (step S519).
转移至图57-2,从与进行了网络参数改写处理的网络相关联的PLC中,提取需要改写路由参数的PLC(步骤S531)。在提取出的PLC中,从保持在脱机连接通路保持部125中的连接通路较短的PLC开始顺次改写路由参数(步骤S532)。由此,路由参数改写处理完成,参数集中改写处理完成。Transfer to FIG. 57-2, and extract the PLC which needs to rewrite the routing parameter from the PLC associated with the network which performed the network parameter rewriting process (step S531). Among the extracted PLCs, routing parameters are rewritten sequentially from PLCs with shorter connection paths held in the offline connection path holding unit 125 (step S532 ). Thus, the routing parameter rewriting process is completed, and the parameter collective rewriting process is completed.
(2)处理的具体例子(2) Specific examples of processing
由于在上述的说明中,对多个网络的参数集中改写处理的概要进行了记述,所以下面针对该处理的具体例子详细地进行说明。在这里,针对下述情况进行说明,即,对于以通过实施方式6计算出的图53-1~图53-4的路由参数而进行动作的图28所示的控制系统,将控制器间网络No.1变更为控制器间网络No.9,将控制器间网络No.3变更为控制器间网络No.10。In the above description, the outline of the collective rewriting process of parameters of a plurality of networks has been described, so a specific example of this process will be described in detail below. Here, a case will be described in which, for the control system shown in FIG. 28 that operates with the routing parameters in FIGS. No. 1 is changed to inter-controller network No. 9, and inter-controller network No. 3 is changed to inter-controller network No. 10.
首先,根据实施方式1中说明的方法,取得进行动作的图28所示的控制系统的联机网络结构信息,并储存在联机网络结构信息保持部116中。First, according to the method described in
然后,根据在实施方式4中说明的方法,由系统结构编辑部121使分别在脱机状态下将控制器间网络No.1变更为控制器间网络No.9、将控制器间网络No.3变更为控制器间网络No.10的脱机网络结构信息,储存在脱机网络结构信息保持部122中。另外,根据实施方式6中说明的方法,基于变更后的脱机网络结构信息进行路由参数的计算。图58-1~图58-4是表示控制系统的构成变更后的路由参数的图。Then, according to the method described in
然后,对联机网络结构信息和脱机网络结构信息进行比较,提取参数存在变更的网络。在这里,提取出如下情况,即,联机网络结构信息的控制器间网络No.1、No.3的部分在脱机网络结构信息中分别变更为控制器间网络No.9、No.10。Then, the online network structure information is compared with the offline network structure information, and the network with changed parameters is extracted. Here, it is extracted that the parts of the inter-controller networks No. 1 and No. 3 in the online network configuration information are respectively changed to inter-controller networks No. 9 and No. 10 in the offline network configuration information.
然后,针对存在变更的各个控制器间网络,执行图55-2所示的各个PLC的参数改写处理。即,首先针对存在变更的控制器间网络No.1,实施各个PLC的参数改写处理,然后,针对存在变更的控制器间网络No.3,实施各个PLC的参数改写处理。Then, the parameter rewriting process of each PLC shown in FIG. 55-2 is performed with respect to each inter-controller network which changed. That is, first, the parameter rewriting process of each PLC is performed with respect to the inter-controller network No. 1 in which the change occurred, and then the parameter rewriting process of each PLC is performed with respect to the inter-controller network No. 3 with the change.
然后,如下所示,实施在图57-2所示的与存在变更的控制器间网络No.1、No.3相关联的路由参数的改写处理。Then, as follows, rewriting processing of the routing parameters associated with the changed inter-controller networks No. 1 and No. 3 shown in FIG. 57-2 is carried out.
首先,提取出在重新计算出的图58-1~图58-4的路由参数中,需要改写路由参数的PLC。在这里,由于控制器间网络No.1变更为控制器间网络No.9,控制器间网络No.3变更为控制器间网络No.10,所以改写包含上述要素的当前使用的图53-1~图53-4所示的所有路由参数。即,需要向PLCπ写入图58-1所示的新路由参数,向PLCα写入图58-2所示的新路由参数,向PLCβ写入图58-3所示的新路由参数,向PLCμ写入图58-4所示的新路由参数Pμq。First, extract the PLC whose routing parameters need to be rewritten among the recalculated routing parameters in Fig. 58-1 to Fig. 58-4. Here, since inter-controller network No.1 is changed to inter-controller network No.9, and inter-controller network No.3 is changed to inter-controller network No.10, the currently used Figure 53- 1 to all routing parameters shown in Figure 53-4. That is, it is necessary to write the new routing parameters shown in Figure 58-1 to PLCπ, write the new routing parameters shown in Figure 58-2 to PLCα, write the new routing parameters shown in Figure 58-3 to PLCβ, and write the new routing parameters shown in Figure 58-3 to PLCμ. Write the new routing parameter Pμq shown in Figure 58-4.
在进行上述路由参数的写入处理时,在这些PLC中,以从保持在脱机连接通路保持部125中的连接通路较短的PLC开始的顺序,改写路由参数。在这里,保持在脱机连接通路保持部125中的脱机连接通路,是针对在脱机状态下编辑出的网络系统结构,在计算路由参数时使用的连接通路。在这里,由于直接连接的PLCπ的连接通路最短,所以首先向PLCπ写入图58-1的新路由参数。When performing the above-mentioned writing process of the routing parameters, among these PLCs, the routing parameters are rewritten in order from the PLC with the shorter connection path held in the offline connection
然后,参照脱机连接通路保持部125,提取其中的连接通路最短的PLC。其中的连接通路最短的PLC为PLCα。由此,接着向PLCα写入图58-2的新路由参数。Then, referring to the offline connection
相同地,连接通路次短的PLC为PLCβ以及PLCμ,向PLCβ写入图58-3的新路由参数,向PLCμ写入图58-4的新路由参数。由此,路由参数的改写处理以及多个网络的参数集中改写处理完成。Similarly, the PLCs with the next shortest connection paths are PLCβ and PLCμ, and the new routing parameters of FIG. 58-3 are written to PLCβ, and the new routing parameters of FIG. 58-4 are written to PLCμ. Thus, the rewriting process of the routing parameters and the collective rewriting process of the parameters of a plurality of networks are completed.
在这里,在针对改写网络参数的PLC顺次应用实施方式7的方法的情况下,可以自动地改写包含路由参数的变更在内的各个PLC的网络参数,但有时存在需要多次改写路由参数的PLC。即,在向PLCπ中写入反映了将控制器间网络No.1变更为控制器间网络No.9的路由参数后,需要再次向PLCπ写入反映了将控制器间网络No.3变更为控制器间网络No.10的路由参数。但是,通过利用上述方法,可以将这些路由参数集中写入,可以使得将网络参数的变更所涉及的路由参数的变更向各个PLC写入的作业高效化。Here, when the method of Embodiment 7 is sequentially applied to the PLCs that rewrite the network parameters, the network parameters of each PLC including the change of the routing parameters can be automatically rewritten, but there may be times when the routing parameters need to be rewritten PLC. That is, after writing the routing parameters reflecting the change of the inter-controller network No. 1 to the inter-controller network No. Routing parameters of inter-controller network No.10. However, by using the method described above, these routing parameters can be collectively written, and the work of writing the routing parameter change related to the network parameter change to each PLC can be made more efficient.
根据本实施方式8,由于在脱机状态下构成控制系统的大于或等于2个的网络的网络参数发生了变更的情况下,首先从与起点PLC的连接通路较远的网络开始顺次仅变更网络参数,然后以与起点PLC的连接通路较近者开始顺次变更路由参数,所以具有可以集中进行网络参数的改写的效果。According to the eighth embodiment, when the network parameters of two or more networks constituting the control system are changed in the offline state, only the For the network parameters, the route parameters are changed sequentially starting from the connection path closer to the starting point PLC, so there is an effect that rewriting of the network parameters can be performed intensively.
此外,在上述的实施方式1~8中,例举说明了将可编程控制器作为控制装置与网络连接而成的控制系统的情况,但本发明的主旨并不限定于此。例如,除了可编程控制器之外,也可以相同地应用于数控装置或动作控制器、机器人控制器等控制装置与网络连接而成的控制系统。In addition, in the above-mentioned
另外,上述的控制系统设计方法可以通过下述方法实现,即,将写入了处理步骤的程序由具有CPU(中央运算处理装置)的个人计算机或工作站等计算机执行。在该情况下,计算机的CPU(控制单元)按照程序执行上述程序生成支持方法的各个处理工序。这些程序存储在硬盘、柔性(floppy)(注册商标)磁盘、CD(Compact Disk)-ROM(Read Only Memory)、MO(Magneto-Optical disk)、DVD(Digital Versatile Disk或者Digital Video Disk)等可以由计算机进行读取的存储介质中,通过由计算机从存储介质中读出并执行。另外,这些程序也可以经由因特网等网络(通信线路)发布。In addition, the control system design method described above can be realized by a method in which a program in which processing steps are written is executed by a computer such as a personal computer or a workstation having a CPU (Central Processing Unit). In this case, the CPU (control unit) of the computer executes each processing procedure of the above-described program generation support method according to a program. These programs are stored on hard disk, flexible (floppy) (registered trademark) disk, CD (Compact Disk)-ROM (Read Only Memory), MO (Magneto-Optical disk), DVD (Digital Versatile Disk or Digital Video Disk), etc. In the storage medium readable by the computer, the computer reads and executes the storage medium from the storage medium. In addition, these programs may be distributed via a network (communication line) such as the Internet.
工业实用性Industrial Applicability
如上所述,本发明所涉及的控制系统设计装置,在对生产设备等上设置的控制系统的系统结构及连接通路进行把握这方面有效。As described above, the control system design device according to the present invention is effective in grasping the system configuration and connection paths of a control system installed in production equipment and the like.
Claims (3)
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN201210211237.5A CN102819231B (en) | 2007-05-31 | 2007-05-31 | Control system design device |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN201210211237.5A CN102819231B (en) | 2007-05-31 | 2007-05-31 | Control system design device |
Related Parent Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN2007800531668A Division CN101681157B (en) | 2007-05-31 | 2007-05-31 | Control system design device |
Publications (2)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| CN102819231A true CN102819231A (en) | 2012-12-12 |
| CN102819231B CN102819231B (en) | 2015-03-18 |
Family
ID=47303385
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN201210211237.5A Expired - Fee Related CN102819231B (en) | 2007-05-31 | 2007-05-31 | Control system design device |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN102819231B (en) |
Cited By (2)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN107003664A (en) * | 2014-12-15 | 2017-08-01 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Information system construction support tool and information system construction support program |
| CN108885437A (en) * | 2016-03-29 | 2018-11-23 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Programmable logic controller (PLC) |
Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPH06120968A (en) * | 1992-10-09 | 1994-04-28 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Network management device and network configuration management method |
| US5838907A (en) * | 1996-02-20 | 1998-11-17 | Compaq Computer Corporation | Configuration manager for network devices and an associated method for providing configuration information thereto |
| JPH117421A (en) * | 1997-06-19 | 1999-01-12 | Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd | Network simulator |
| CN1432242A (en) * | 2001-03-29 | 2003-07-23 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Network management system |
| JP2006277734A (en) * | 2005-03-01 | 2006-10-12 | Omron Corp | Network configuration diagram display device |
-
2007
- 2007-05-31 CN CN201210211237.5A patent/CN102819231B/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
Patent Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPH06120968A (en) * | 1992-10-09 | 1994-04-28 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Network management device and network configuration management method |
| US5838907A (en) * | 1996-02-20 | 1998-11-17 | Compaq Computer Corporation | Configuration manager for network devices and an associated method for providing configuration information thereto |
| JPH117421A (en) * | 1997-06-19 | 1999-01-12 | Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd | Network simulator |
| CN1432242A (en) * | 2001-03-29 | 2003-07-23 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Network management system |
| JP2006277734A (en) * | 2005-03-01 | 2006-10-12 | Omron Corp | Network configuration diagram display device |
Cited By (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN107003664A (en) * | 2014-12-15 | 2017-08-01 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Information system construction support tool and information system construction support program |
| CN107003664B (en) * | 2014-12-15 | 2019-04-19 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Information system construction assistance tool and information system construction assistance program |
| CN108885437A (en) * | 2016-03-29 | 2018-11-23 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Programmable logic controller (PLC) |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN102819231B (en) | 2015-03-18 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| CN101681157B (en) | Control system design device | |
| CN103403720B (en) | The Design assistant device of network system | |
| EP2823366B1 (en) | System and method for visualizing device data and network of an industrial plant in one display | |
| EP3065017B1 (en) | Safety relay configuration editor | |
| CN103064992B (en) | A kind of wiring storage organization based on direct net lattice point and wiring method thereof | |
| WO2014071996A1 (en) | System and method for visualizing a combined physical and virtual communication network of a power plant | |
| US20090088871A1 (en) | Historian integrated with mes appliance | |
| US10230589B2 (en) | Methods, systems, and computer readable media for configuring service networks | |
| GB2433675A (en) | Routing and communications circuit design using high and low level network models | |
| CN102142991B (en) | Method and system for simulating network cutting | |
| JP4746091B2 (en) | Network design processing apparatus, network design processing method, and network design processing program | |
| CN114219373A (en) | Method, system, device and medium for generating digital process visual flow chart | |
| CN111711677A (en) | Method, system and medium for visualizing virtual and real loops of switches in process layer of smart substation | |
| CN102819231A (en) | Control system design device | |
| JP5489535B2 (en) | System configuration design apparatus, system configuration design program, and recording medium | |
| WO2010103700A1 (en) | Program creation support device | |
| EP2378713B1 (en) | Register configurator, register configuration method and field control system | |
| CN119316300A (en) | Method and system for generating a network topology map | |
| CN115345078B (en) | A cable management method and device based on cable iteration model | |
| CN117634110A (en) | Machine room link wiring selection method | |
| Stoess et al. | Automated network layout for the industrial communication engineering system NetGen: X | |
| CN114817642B (en) | A method, device and computer equipment for generating thematic map of distribution network | |
| Keller et al. | Tool-Support to Foster Model-based Requirements Engineering for Cyber-Phsyical Systems. | |
| JP4246666B2 (en) | Node position calculation program and node position calculation apparatus | |
| CN121074336A (en) | Methods for automatically identifying cable tray dimensions in Revit models |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| C06 | Publication | ||
| PB01 | Publication | ||
| C10 | Entry into substantive examination | ||
| SE01 | Entry into force of request for substantive examination | ||
| C14 | Grant of patent or utility model | ||
| GR01 | Patent grant | ||
| CF01 | Termination of patent right due to non-payment of annual fee |
Granted publication date: 20150318 Termination date: 20190531 |
|
| CF01 | Termination of patent right due to non-payment of annual fee |